WO2025027044A1

WO2025027044A1 - Power control of sidelink communications

Info

Publication number: WO2025027044A1
Application number: PCT/EP2024/071609
Authority: WO
Inventors: Hyoungsuk Jeon; Hua Zhou; Esmael Hejazi Dinan; Huifa LIN; Ali Cagatay CIRIK; Nazanin Rastegardoost
Original assignee: Koninklijke Philips NV
Current assignee: Koninklijke Philips NV
Priority date: 2023-07-31
Filing date: 2024-07-30
Publication date: 2025-02-06
Anticipated expiration: 2026-01-31

Abstract

The invention relates to a method comprising: receiving, by a first wireless device and from a base station, one or more messages indicating a sidelink filter configuration; and transmitting, to a second wireless device, at least one sidelink reference signal (RS) using a transmit power based on a pathloss value, wherein the pathloss value is based on a sidelink RS transmit power, per resource element, filtered across sidelink RS transmission occasions using the sidelink filter configuration.

Description

Power Control of Sidelink Communications FIELD OF THE INVENTION [0001] This invention relates to wireless communication, in particular to wireless network allowing enabling device to device communication, such as Sidelink in LTE or 5G or 6G networks, or Wifi networks. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION [0002] In conventional wireless technologies, a transmitting wireless device and/or sensing (or monitoring or receiving) wireless device may determine (e.g., assume) that a signal strength (or transmission power of a transmitting wireless device) during the slot is static (e.g., maintained/kept as the same or constant) and varies dynamically across slots (e.g., different and/or adjacent slots). For example, in the existing technologies, a power transition (e.g., transmission power level change) may occur across adjacent (and/or consecutive) slots, e.g., between an automatic gain control (AGC) symbol of a slot and a guard symbol of a preceding slot. For example, in the existing technologies, power transition (e.g., transmission power level change) may not occur (e.g., may be substantially negligible to calibrate the power at the receiver) during a slot (e.g., after a AGC symbol of the slot, between two AGC symbols in the same slot, and/or between two AGC symbols across adjacent slots). For example, the AGC symbol (e.g., located at the 1^st symbol and/or firstly occurred symbol in a slot) is for the receiving wireless device or sensing wireless device to calibrate its receiver’s gain and/or maintain/keep a relative constant output signal against the varying input signal (e.g., varying receiving power level or power transition across the adjacent slots). [0003] FIG.34 illustrates an example of transmission power and frequency in a slot in a wireless network, for example in a 5G network implementing Sidelink. FIG.34 shows the implementation of the existing technologies applied to Sidelink (SL), Reference Signal(s) (RS(s)) are transmitted with PSCCH and/or PSSCH in a TDM manner (e.g., FIG.33A, FIG. 33B, FIG.33C, and/or FIG.33D). [0004] A first figure on the top of FIG.34 shows a transmission power (e.g., measured power at the transmitter) of sidelink transmissions or a reception power (e.g., measured power at the receiver) of sidelink transmissions changed over time. A second figure on the bottom of FIG.34 illustrates a frequency (and/or subchannel/PRB location) of sidelink transmissions as a function of time, e.g., time-frequency resource allocation of each channel and/or symbol (e.g., PSCCH, PSSCH, and/or SL RS(s)). The first figure and the second figure in FIG.34 are timely aligned to each other, e.g., as shown in the slot boundary between slot n-1 and slot n and the one between slot n and slot n+1 (e.g., n is an integer number). For example, FIG.34 shows that according to resource allocation of each channel, the transmission power (or reception power) changes. [0005] In FIG.34, at least one symbol (e.g., the last symbol and/or lastly occurred symbol in a slot) may be assigned as guard symbol(s) to provide a time gap for a wireless device to switch from a transmission mode to a reception mode (or vice versa). For example, in FIG. 34, the last symbol of each of slot n-1 and slot n is assigned as the guard symbol. [0006] For example, in FIG.34, the firstly occurred symbol in each of slot n and slot n+1 is assigned as a AGC symbol. For example, in FIG.34, a power transition may occur between slot n-1 and slot n (e.g., during a guard symbol in slot n-1 and/or during AGC symbol in slot n) and/or between slot n and slot n+1 (e.g., during a guard symbol in slot n and/or during AGC symbol in slot n+1). In FIG.34, a second wireless device (e.g., a receiving and/or sensing wireless device) may calibrate the power at the receiver side during an AGC symbol by calibrating the power. [0007] A problem arises when a first wireless device transmits, using different power, SL RS(s) with PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the same slot. For example, a first wireless device transmits the SL RS(s) with PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the same slot in a TDM manner (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and/or FIG.33D). Each of transmissions (e.g., SL RS(s) with PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the same slot) may have or be associated with a respective performance metric (e.g., QoS requirement, detection rate, false alarm rate, miss- detection rate, etc) to be guaranteed or achieved. To guarantee the respective performance metric, the first wireless device may determine transmission powers for different channels (e.g., SL RS(s) with PSCCH and/or PSSCH) in a slot, which results in a power transition during the slot, e.g., when a first transmission (e.g., SL RS(s), PSCCH, and/or PSSCH) is switched to a second transmission (e.g., SL RS(s), PSCCH, and/or PSSCH which is different from the first transmission) during the slot. [0008] The implementation of the existing technologies results in a power transition within a slot. The power transition may occur between the first transmission and the second transmission within slot n (e.g., after AGC symbol). In the existing technologies, the second wireless device may not be aware of the power transition within slot n. In the existing technologies, there is no AGC symbol for the power transition caused by two different powers for two different transmissions within a same slot. This power transition results in an inaccurate gain control of AGC, e.g., for the second wireless device to receive, detect, and/or decode the second transmission. For example, the inaccurate gain control of AGC causes the receiver to include large amount of unwanted (e.g., interference and/or noise) signal and/or to clip a received signal (e.g., a received signal with a large power). As a result, a decoding failure occurs and/or the received signal is distorted (e.g., with information loss). [0009] In the example of FIG.34, a power transition occurs within slot n (e.g., during one or more symbols) where the first wireless device switches between PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) and SL RS(s) transmission. The first wireless device may schedule and/or transmit a first transmission of PSSCH and/or PSSCH and a second transmission of SL RS(s) in slot n. The first wireless device may determine a first transmission power (e.g., power for PSCCH and/or PSSCH in slot n in FIG.34) used for the first transmission of PSSCH and/or PSSCH. The first wireless device may determine a second transmission power (e.g., for SL RS(s) in slot n in FIG.34) used for the second transmission of SL RS(s) which may be different from the first transmission power. The first wireless device may transmit an AGC signal via a AGC symbol (e.g., with symbol index 0 or firstly located/occurred symbol) in slot n. [0010] The first wireless device may determine a transmission power of the AGC signal as the same as the first transmission power used for the first transmission of PSSCH and/or PSSCH. [0011] The second wireless device that monitors and/or senses one or more sidelink transmissions in slot n may perform the AGC training using the AGC signal received from the first wireless device via the AGC symbol. For example, the second wireless device adjusts an AGC gain of the second wireless device’s receiver for receiving the one or more sidelink transmission (started from the next symbol (e.g., symbol #1) of the AGC symbol) in slot n. The second wireless device may determine that the first wireless device transmits the AGC signal and the one or more sidelink transmission in the same slot (e.g., slot n) using the same power. [0012] In FIG.34, the first wireless device may transmit the second transmission of the SL RS(s) within (e.g., and/or during and/or in) slot n. For example, the second transmission of the SL RS(s) may occur after the AGC symbol (e.g., transmission of the AGC signal) and/or after the first transmission of the PSCCH and/or PSSCH within (e.g., and/or during and/or in) slot n. The first wireless device may use, for and/or during the second transmission, the second transmission power that may be different from the first transmission power. This power change from the first transmission power to the second transmission power causes a sudden power transition within slot n at the receiver of the second wireless device. In this case, the AGC training performed using the AGC symbol according to the existing technologies is not applicable for the reception of the second transmission due to the difference of the first transmission power and the second transmission power. [0013] FIG.34 is an example figure of a sudden power transition (e.g., sudden power increase) within slot n, e.g., when a transmission power that the first wireless device determines for SL RS(s) transmission is higher than a transmission power that the first wireless device determines for PSCCH and/or PSSCH in slot n. The same problem (e.g., sudden power transition within a slot) occurs, e.g., when a transmission power that the first wireless device determines for SL RS(s) transmission is lower than a transmission power that the first wireless device determines for PSCCH and/or PSSCH in slot n. [0014] FIG.34 illustrates a power transition within a slot as an example in which the first transmission of PSCCH and/or PSSCH occurs before the second transmission of the SL RS(s). The same problem occurs when the second transmission of the SL RS(s) occurs before the first transmission of PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the same slot. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION [0015] An aim of the present invention is alleviate the problems of the invention. [0016] Another aim of the invention is to improve the power control of a network enabling a Sidelink or a Device-to-Device communication. [0017] These and other aims are resolved by a method as claimed in claim 1, claim 26, 27, or 28, by a wireless device as claimed in claim 25. [0018] It is noted that the above apparatuses may be implemented based on discrete hardware circuitries with discrete hardware components, integrated chips, or arrangements of chip modules, or based on signal processing devices or chips controlled by software routines or programs stored in memories, written on a computer readable media, or downloaded from a network, such as the Internet. [0019] It shall be understood that the apparatuses and the methods may have similar, corresponding and/or identical preferred embodiments, in particular, as defined in the dependent claims. [0020] It shall be understood that a preferred embodiment of the invention can also be any combination of the dependent claims or above embodiments with the respective independent claim. [0021] These and other aspects of the invention will be apparent from and elucidated with reference to the embodiments described hereinafter. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS [0022] Examples of several aspects of the present disclosure are described herein with reference to the drawings. [0023] FIG.1A and FIG.1B illustrate example mobile communication networks in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. [0024] FIG.2A and FIG.2B respectively illustrate a New Radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocol stack. [0025] FIG.3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG.2A. [0026] FIG.4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG.2A. [0027] FIG.4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU. [0028] FIG.5A and FIG.5B respectively illustrate a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels for the downlink and uplink. [0029] FIG.6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE. [0030] FIG.7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped. [0031] FIG.8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier. [0032] FIG.9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier. [0033] FIG.10A illustrates three carrier aggregation configurations with two component carriers. [0034] FIG.10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups. [0035] FIG.11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block structure and location. [0036] FIG.11B illustrates an example of CSI-RSs that are mapped in the time and frequency domains. [0037] FIG.12A and FIG.12B respectively illustrate examples of three downlink and uplink beam management procedures. [0038] FIG.13A, FIG.13B, and FIG.13C respectively illustrate a four-step contention- based random access procedure, a two-step contention-free random access procedure, and another two-step random access procedure. [0039] FIG.14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part. [0040] FIG.14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing. [0041] FIG.15 illustrates an example of a wireless device in communication with a base station. [0042] FIG.16A, FIG.16B, FIG.16C, and FIG.16D illustrate example structures for uplink and downlink transmission. [0043] FIG.17 illustrates examples of device-to-device (D2D) communication as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0044] FIG.18 illustrates an example of a resource pool for sidelink operations as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0045] FIG.19 illustrates an example of sidelink symbols in a slot as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0046] FIG.20 illustrates an example of resource indication for a first TB (e.g, a first data packet) and resource reservation for a second TB (e.g., a second data packet) as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0047] FIG.21 illustrates an example of configuration information for sidelink communication as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0048] FIG.22 illustrates an example of configuration information for sidelink communication as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0049] FIG.23 illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader for sidelink shared channel (SL-SCH) an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0050] FIG.24 illustrates an example time of a resource selection procedure as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0051] FIG.25 illustrates an example timing of a resource selection procedure as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0052] FIG.26 illustrates an example flowchart of a resource selection procedure by a wireless device for transmitting a TB via sidelink as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0053] FIG.27 illustrates an example diagram of the resource selection procedure among layers of the wireless device as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0054] FIG.28 illustrates an example of a sidelink CSI-RS transmission and a sidelink CSI reporting as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0055] FIG.29 illustrates an example of resource allocation of SL CSI RS as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0056] FIG.30 illustrates an example of SL CSI report as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0057] FIG.31A illustrate examples of SL RSs as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0058] FIG.31B illustrate examples of SL RSs as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0059] FIG.32A illustrates an example for SL RS transmission as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. [0060] FIG.32B illustrates an example for SL RS transmission as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0061] FIG.33A illustrates an example of sidelink channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0062] FIG.33B illustrates an example of sidelink channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0063] FIG.33C illustrates an example of sidelink channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0064] FIG.33D illustrates an example of sidelink channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0065] FIG.34 illustrates an example of transmission power and frequency in a slot as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0066] FIG.35 illustrates an example of a power control as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0067] FIG.36 illustrates an example of power offset as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0068] FIG.37 illustrates an example flowchart of power control as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0069] FIG.38 illustrates an example flowchart of power control as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. DETAILED DESCRIPTION [0070] In the present disclosure, various embodiments are presented as examples of how the disclosed techniques may be implemented and/or how the disclosed techniques may be practiced in environments and scenarios. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art that various changes in form and detail can be made therein without departing from the scope. In fact, after reading the description, it will be apparent to one skilled in the relevant art how to implement alternative embodiments. The present embodiments should not be limited by any of the described exemplary embodiments. The embodiments of the present disclosure will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. Limitations, features, and/or elements from the disclosed example embodiments may be combined to create further embodiments within the scope of the disclosure. Any figures which highlight the functionality and advantages, are presented for example purposes only. The disclosed architecture is sufficiently flexible and configurable, such that it may be utilized in ways other than that shown. For example, the actions listed in any flowchart may be re-ordered or only optionally used in some embodiments. [0071] Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed. The disclosed mechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example, in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment, a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like. Example criteria may be based, at least in part, on for example, wireless device or network node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like. When the one or more criteria are met, various example embodiments may be applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement example embodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols. [0072] A base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wireless devices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/or multiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices may have some specific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/or capability(ies). When this disclosure refers to a base station communicating with a plurality of wireless devices, this disclosure may refer to a subset of the total wireless devices in a coverage area. This disclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices of a given LTE or 5G release with a given capability and in a given sector of the base station. The plurality of wireless devices in this disclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in a coverage area which perform according to disclosed methods, and/or the like. There may be a plurality of base stations or a plurality of wireless devices in a coverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, for example, those wireless devices or base stations may perform based on older releases of LTE or 5G technology. [0073] In this disclosure, “a” and “an” and similar phrases are to be interpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” Similarly, any term that ends with the suffix “(s)” is to be interpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” In this disclosure, the term “may” is to be interpreted as “may, for example.” In other words, the term “may” is indicative that the phrase following the term “may” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed by one or more of the various embodiments. The terms “comprises” and “consists of”, as used herein, enumerate one or more components of the element being described. The term “comprises” is interchangeable with “includes” and does not exclude unenumerated components from being included in the element being described. By contrast, “consists of” provides a complete enumeration of the one or more components of the element being described. The term “based on”, as used herein, should be interpreted as “based at least in part on” rather than, for example, “based solely on”. The term “and/or” as used herein represents any possible combination of enumerated elements. For example, “A, B, and/or C” may represent A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; or A, B, and C. [0074] If A and B are sets and every element of A is an element of B, A is called a subset of B. In this specification, only non-empty sets and subsets are considered. For example, possible subsets of B = {cell1, cell2} are: {cell1}, {cell2}, and {cell1, cell2}. The phrase “based on” (or equally “based at least on”) is indicative that the phrase following the term “based on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “in response to” (or equally “in response at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “in response to” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “depending on” (or equally “depending at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “depending on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “employing/using” (or equally “employing/using at least”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “employing/using” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. [0075] The term configured may relate to the capacity of a device whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state. Configured may refer to specific settings in a device that effect the operational characteristics of the device whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state. In other words, the hardware, software, firmware, registers, memory values, and/or the like may be “configured” within a device, whether the device is in an operational or nonoperational state, to provide the device with specific characteristics. Terms such as “a control message to cause in a device” may mean that a control message has parameters that may be used to configure specific characteristics or may be used to implement certain actions in the device, whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state. [0076] In this disclosure, parameters (or equally called, fields, or Information elements: IEs) may comprise one or more information objects, and an information object may comprise one or more other objects. For example, if parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M, and parameter (IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K, and parameter (IE) K comprises parameter (information element) J. Then, for example, N comprises K, and N comprises J. In an example embodiment, when one or more messages comprise a plurality of parameters, it implies that a parameter in the plurality of parameters is in at least one of the one or more messages, but does not have to be in each of the one or more messages. [0077] Many features presented are described as being optional through the use of “may” or the use of parentheses. For the sake of brevity and legibility, the present disclosure does not explicitly recite each and every permutation that may be obtained by choosing from the set of optional features. The present disclosure is to be interpreted as explicitly disclosing all such permutations. For example, a system described as having three optional features may be embodied in seven ways, namely with just one of the three possible features, with any two of the three possible features or with three of the three possible features. [0078] Many of the elements described in the disclosed embodiments may be implemented as modules. A module is defined here as an element that performs a defined function and has a defined interface to other elements. The modules described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (e.g. hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, which may be behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may be implemented as a software routine written in a computer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, MATLAB or the like) or a modeling/simulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, or LabVIEWMathScript. It may be possible to implement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete or programmable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples of programmable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs). Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like. FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL) such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog that configure connections between internal hardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device. The mentioned technologies are often used in combination to achieve the result of a functional module. [0079] FIG.1A illustrates an example of a mobile communication network 100 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. The mobile communication network 100 may be, for example, a public land mobile network (PLMN) run by a network operator. As illustrated in FIG.1A, the mobile communication network 100 includes a core network (CN) 102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and a wireless device 106. [0080] The CN 102 may provide the wireless device 106 with an interface to one or more data networks (DNs), such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra- operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connections between the wireless device 106 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the wireless device 106, and provide charging functionality. [0081] The RAN 104 may connect the CN 102 to the wireless device 106 through radio communications over an air interface. As part of the radio communications, the RAN 104 may provide scheduling, radio resource management, and retransmission protocols. The communication direction from the RAN 104 to the wireless device 106 over the air interface is known as the downlink and the communication direction from the wireless device 106 to the RAN 104 over the air interface is known as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using frequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD), and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques. [0082] The term wireless device may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass any mobile device or fixed (non-mobile) device for which wireless communication is needed or usable. For example, a wireless device may be a telephone, smart phone, tablet, computer, laptop, sensor, meter, wearable device, Internet of Things (IoT) device, vehicle road side unit (RSU), relay node, automobile, and/or any combination thereof. The term wireless device encompasses other terminology, including user equipment (UE), user terminal (UT), access terminal (AT), mobile station, handset, wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU), and/or wireless communication device. [0083] The RAN 104 may include one or more base stations (not shown). The term base station may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass a Node B (associated with UMTS and/or 3G standards), an Evolved Node B (eNB, associated with E-UTRA and/or 4G standards), a remote radio head (RRH), a baseband processing unit coupled to one or more RRHs, a repeater node or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a Generation Node B (gNB, associated with NR and/or 5G standards), an access point (AP, associated with, for example, WiFi or any other suitable wireless communication standard), and/or any combination thereof. A base station may comprise at least one gNB Central Unit (gNB-CU) and at least one a gNB Distributed Unit (gNB-DU). [0084] A base station included in the RAN 104 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 over the air interface. For example, one or more of the base stations may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). The size of a cell may be determined by a range at which a receiver (e.g., a base station receiver) can successfully receive the transmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter) operating in the cell. Together, the cells of the base stations may provide radio coverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographic area to support wireless device mobility. [0085] In addition to three-sector sites, other implementations of base stations are possible. For example, one or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as a sectored site with more or less than three sectors. One or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as an access point, as a baseband processing unit coupled to several remote radio heads (RRHs), and/or as a repeater or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node. A baseband processing unit coupled to RRHs may be part of a centralized or cloud RAN architecture, where the baseband processing unit may be either centralized in a pool of baseband processing units or virtualized. A repeater node may amplify and rebroadcast a radio signal received from a donor node. A relay node may perform the same/similar functions as a repeater node but may decode the radio signal received from the donor node to remove noise before amplifying and rebroadcasting the radio signal. [0086] The RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of macrocell base stations that have similar antenna patterns and similar high-level transmit powers. The RAN 104 may be deployed as a heterogeneous network. In heterogeneous networks, small cell base stations may be used to provide small coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlap with the comparatively larger coverage areas provided by macrocell base stations. The small coverage areas may be provided in areas with high data traffic (or so-called “hotspots”) or in areas with weak macrocell coverage. Examples of small cell base stations include, in order of decreasing coverage area, microcell base stations, picocell base stations, and femtocell base stations or home base stations. [0087] The Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) was formed in 1998 to provide global standardization of specifications for mobile communication networks similar to the mobile communication network 100 in FIG.1A. To date, 3GPP has produced specifications for three generations of mobile networks: a third generation (3G) network known as Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a fourth generation (4G) network known as Long-Term Evolution (LTE), and a fifth generation (5G) network known as 5G System (5GS). Embodiments of the present disclosure are described with reference to the RAN of a 3GPP 5G network, referred to as next-generation RAN (NG-RAN). Embodiments may be applicable to RANs of other mobile communication networks, such as the RAN 104 in FIG. 1A, the RANs of earlier 3G and 4G networks, and those of future networks yet to be specified (e.g., a 3GPP 6G network). NG-RAN implements 5G radio access technology known as New Radio (NR) and may be provisioned to implement 4G radio access technology or other radio access technologies, including non-3GPP radio access technologies. [0088] FIG.1B illustrates another example mobile communication network 150 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. Mobile communication network 150 may be, for example, a PLMN run by a network operator. As illustrated in FIG.1B, mobile communication network 150 includes a 5G core network (5G-CN) 152, an NG-RAN 154, and UEs 156A and 156B (collectively UEs 156). These components may be implemented and operate in the same or similar manner as corresponding components described with respect to FIG.1A. [0089] The 5G-CN 152 provides the UEs 156 with an interface to one or more DNs, such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the 5G-CN 152 may set up end-to-end connections between the UEs 156 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the UEs 156, and provide charging functionality. Compared to the CN of a 3GPP 4G network, the basis of the 5G-CN 152 may be a service- based architecture. This means that the architecture of the nodes making up the 5G-CN 152 may be defined as network functions that offer services via interfaces to other network functions. The network functions of the 5G-CN 152 may be implemented in several ways, including as network elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as software instances running on dedicated or shared hardware, or as virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud-based platform). [0090] As illustrated in FIG.1B, the 5G-CN 152 includes an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) 158A and a User Plane Function (UPF) 158B, which are shown as one component AMF/UPF 158 in FIG.1B for ease of illustration. The UPF 158B may serve as a gateway between the NG-RAN 154 and the one or more DNs. The UPF 158B may perform functions such as packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane policy rule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classification to support routing of traffic flows to the one or more DNs, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., packet filtering, gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplink traffic verification), downlink packet buffering, and downlink data notification triggering. The UPF 158B may serve as an anchor point for intra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, an external protocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to the one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to support a multi-homed PDU session. The UEs 156 may be configured to receive services through a PDU session, which is a logical connection between a UE and a DN. [0091] The AMF 158A may perform functions such as Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS) security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between 3GPP access networks, idle mode UE reachability (e.g., control and execution of paging retransmission), registration area management, intra-system and inter-system mobility support, access authentication, access authorization including checking of roaming rights, mobility management control (subscription and policies), network slicing support, and/or session management function (SMF) selection. NAS may refer to the functionality operating between a CN and a UE, and AS may refer to the functionality operating between the UE and a RAN. [0092] The 5G-CN 152 may include one or more additional network functions that are not shown in FIG.1B for the sake of clarity. For example, the 5G-CN 152 may include one or more of a Session Management Function (SMF), an NR Repository Function (NRF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), a Network Exposure Function (NEF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), and/or an Authentication Server Function (AUSF). [0093] The NG-RAN 154 may connect the 5G-CN 152 to the UEs 156 through radio communications over the air interface. The NG-RAN 154 may include one or more gNBs, illustrated as gNB 160A and gNB 160B (collectively gNBs 160) and/or one or more ng-eNBs, illustrated as ng-eNB 162A and ng-eNB 162B (collectively ng-eNBs 162). The gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may be more generically referred to as base stations. The gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the UEs 156 over an air interface. For example, one or more of the gNBs 160 and/or one or more of the ng-eNBs 162 may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). Together, the cells of the gNBs 160 and the ng-eNBs 162 may provide radio coverage to the UEs 156 over a wide geographic area to support UE mobility. [0094] As shown in FIG.1B, the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the 5G-CN 152 by means of an NG interface and to other base stations by an Xn interface. The NG and Xn interfaces may be established using direct physical connections and/or indirect connections over an underlying transport network, such as an internet protocol (IP) transport network. The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the UEs 156 by means of a Uu interface. For example, as illustrated in FIG.1B, gNB 160A may be connected to the UE 156A by means of a Uu interface. The NG, Xn, and Uu interfaces are associated with a protocol stack. The protocol stacks associated with the interfaces may be used by the network elements in FIG.1B to exchange data and signaling messages and may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user. The control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements. [0095] The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to one or more AMF/UPF functions of the 5G-CN 152, such as the AMF/UPF 158, by means of one or more NG interfaces. For example, the gNB 160A may be connected to the UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 by means of an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface. The NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g., non-guaranteed delivery) of user plane PDUs between the gNB 160A and the UPF 158B. The gNB 160A may be connected to the AMF 158A by means of an NG-Control plane (NG-C) interface. The NG-C interface may provide, for example, NG interface management, UE context management, UE mobility management, transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, and configuration transfer and/or warning message transmission. [0096] The gNBs 160 may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over the Uu interface. For example, the gNB 160A may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations toward the UE 156A over a Uu interface associated with a first protocol stack. The ng-eNBs 162 may provide Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over a Uu interface, where E-UTRA refers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology. For example, the ng-eNB 162B may provide E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UE 156B over a Uu interface associated with a second protocol stack. [0097] The 5G-CN 152 was described as being configured to handle NR and 4G radio accesses. It will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that it may be possible for NR to connect to a 4G core network in a mode known as “non-standalone operation.” In non- standalone operation, a 4G core network is used to provide (or at least support) control-plane functionality (e.g., initial access, mobility, and paging). Although only one AMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG.1B, one gNB or ng-eNB may be connected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes to provide redundancy and/or to load share across the multiple AMF/UPF nodes. [0098] As discussed, an interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and NG interfaces) between the network elements in FIG.1B may be associated with a protocol stack that the network elements use to exchange data and signaling messages. A protocol stack may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user, and the control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements. [0099] FIG.2A and FIG.2B respectively illustrate examples of NR user plane and NR control plane protocol stacks for the Uu interface that lies between a UE 210 and a gNB 220. The protocol stacks illustrated in FIG.2A and FIG.2B may be the same or similar to those used for the Uu interface between, for example, the UE 156A and the gNB 160A shown in FIG.1B. [0100] FIG.2A illustrates a NR user plane protocol stack comprising five layers implemented in the UE 210 and the gNB 220. At the bottom of the protocol stack, physical layers (PHYs) 211 and 221 may provide transport services to the higher layers of the protocol stack and may correspond to layer 1 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. The next four protocols above PHYs 211 and 221 comprise media access control layers (MACs) 212 and 222, radio link control layers (RLCs) 213 and 223, packet data convergence protocol layers (PDCPs) 214 and 224, and service data application protocol layers (SDAPs) 215 and 225. Together, these four protocols may make up layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model. [0101] FIG.3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack. Starting from the top of FIG.2A and FIG.3, the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform QoS flow handling. The UE 210 may receive services through a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between the UE 210 and a DN. The PDU session may have one or more QoS flows. A UPF of a CN (e.g., the UPF 158B) may map IP packets to the one or more QoS flows of the PDU session based on QoS requirements (e.g., in terms of delay, data rate, and/or error rate). The SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform mapping/de- mapping between the one or more QoS flows and one or more data radio bearers. The mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers may be determined by the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220. The SDAP 215 at the UE 210 may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers through reflective mapping or control signaling received from the gNB 220. For reflective mapping, the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220 may mark the downlink packets with a QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may be observed by the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 to determine the mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers. [0102] The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform header compression/decompression to reduce the amount of data that needs to be transmitted over the air interface, ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding of data transmitted over the air interface, and integrity protection (to ensure control messages originate from intended sources. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets, in-sequence delivery and reordering of packets, and removal of packets received in duplicate due to, for example, an intra-gNB handover. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform packet duplication to improve the likelihood of the packet being received and, at the receiver, remove any duplicate packets. Packet duplication may be useful for services that require high reliability. [0103] Although not shown in FIG.3, PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform mapping/de- mapping between a split radio bearer and RLC channels in a dual connectivity scenario. Dual connectivity is a technique that allows a UE to connect to two cells or, more generally, two cell groups: a master cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group (SCG). A split bearer is when a single radio bearer, such as one of the radio bearers provided by the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs 215 and 225, is handled by cell groups in dual connectivity. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may map/de-map the split radio bearer between RLC channels belonging to cell groups. [0104] The RLCs 213 and 223 may perform segmentation, retransmission through Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and removal of duplicate data units received from MACs 212 and 222, respectively. The RLCs 213 and 223 may support three transmission modes: transparent mode (TM); unacknowledged mode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM). Based on the transmission mode an RLC is operating, the RLC may perform one or more of the noted functions. The RLC configuration may be per logical channel with no dependency on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations. As shown in FIG.3, the RLCs 213 and 223 may provide RLC channels as a service to PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively. [0105] The MACs 212 and 222 may perform multiplexing/demultiplexing of logical channels and/or mapping between logical channels and transport channels. The multiplexing/demultiplexing may include multiplexing/demultiplexing of data units, belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/from Transport Blocks (TBs) delivered to/from the PHYs 211 and 221. The MAC 222 may be configured to perform scheduling, scheduling information reporting, and priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling. Scheduling may be performed in the gNB 220 (at the MAC 222) for downlink and uplink. The MACs 212 and 222 may be configured to perform error correction through Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) (e.g., one HARQ entity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priority handling between logical channels of the UE 210 by means of logical channel prioritization, and/or padding. The MACs 212 and 222 may support one or more numerologies and/or transmission timings. In an example, mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization may control which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channel may use. As shown in FIG.3, the MACs 212 and 222 may provide logical channels as a service to the RLCs 213 and 223. [0106] The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform mapping of transport channels to physical channels and digital and analog signal processing functions for sending and receiving information over the air interface. These digital and analog signal processing functions may include, for example, coding/decoding and modulation/demodulation. The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform multi-antenna mapping. As shown in FIG.3, the PHYs 211 and 221 may provide one or more transport channels as a service to the MACs 212 and 222. [0107] FIG.4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack. FIG.4A illustrates a downlink data flow of three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) through the NR user plane protocol stack to generate two TBs at the gNB 220. An uplink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink data flow depicted in FIG.4A. [0108] The downlink data flow of FIG.4A begins when SDAP 225 receives the three IP packets from one or more QoS flows and maps the three packets to radio bearers. In FIG.4A, the SDAP 225 maps IP packets n and n+1 to a first radio bearer 402 and maps IP packet m to a second radio bearer 404. An SDAP header (labeled with an “H” in FIG.4A) is added to an IP packet. The data unit from/to a higher protocol layer is referred to as a service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer and the data unit to/from a lower protocol layer is referred to as a protocol data unit (PDU) of the higher protocol layer. As shown in FIG.4A, the data unit from the SDAP 225 is an SDU of lower protocol layer PDCP 224 and is a PDU of the SDAP 225. [0109] The remaining protocol layers in FIG.4A may perform their associated functionality (e.g., with respect to FIG.3), add corresponding headers, and forward their respective outputs to the next lower layer. For example, the PDCP 224 may perform IP-header compression and ciphering and forward its output to the RLC 223. The RLC 223 may optionally perform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet m in FIG.4A) and forward its output to the MAC 222. The MAC 222 may multiplex a number of RLC PDUs and may attach a MAC subheader to an RLC PDU to form a transport block. In NR, the MAC subheaders may be distributed across the MAC PDU, as illustrated in FIG.4A. In LTE, the MAC subheaders may be entirely located at the beginning of the MAC PDU. The NR MAC PDU structure may reduce processing time and associated latency because the MAC PDU subheaders may be computed before the full MAC PDU is assembled. [0110] FIG.4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU. The MAC subheader includes: an SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field for identifying the logical channel from which the MAC SDU originated to aid in the demultiplexing process; a flag (F) for indicating the size of the SDU length field; and a reserved bit (R) field for future use. [0111] FIG.4B further illustrates MAC control elements (CEs) inserted into the MAC PDU by a MAC, such as MAC 212 or MAC 222. For example, FIG.4B illustrates two MAC CEs inserted into the MAC PDU. MAC CEs may be inserted at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlink transmissions (as shown in FIG.4B) and at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions. MAC CEs may be used for in-band control signaling. Example MAC CEs include: scheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports and power headroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs, such as those for activation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel state information (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission, and prior configured components; discontinuous reception (DRX) related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access related MAC CEs. A MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similar format as described for MAC SDUs and may be identified with a reserved value in the LCID field that indicates the type of control information included in the MAC CE. [0112] Before describing the NR control plane protocol stack, logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels are first described as well as a mapping between the channel types. One or more of the channels may be used to carry out functions associated with the NR control plane protocol stack described later below. [0113] FIG.5A and FIG.5B illustrate, for downlink and uplink respectively, a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels. Information is passed through channels between the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY of the NR protocol stack. A logical channel may be used between the RLC and the MAC and may be classified as a control channel that carries control and configuration information in the NR control plane or as a traffic channel that carries data in the NR user plane. A logical channel may be classified as a dedicated logical channel that is dedicated to a specific UE or as a common logical channel that may be used by more than one UE. A logical channel may also be defined by the type of information it carries. The set of logical channels defined by NR include, for example: [0114] -- a paging control channel (PCCH) for carrying paging messages used to page a UE whose location is not known to the network on a cell level; [0115] -- a broadcast control channel (BCCH) for carrying system information messages in the form of a master information block (MIB) and several system information blocks (SIBs), wherein the system information messages may be used by the UEs to obtain information about how a cell is configured and how to operate within the cell; [0116] -- a common control channel (CCCH) for carrying control messages together with random access; [0117] -- a dedicated control channel (DCCH) for carrying control messages to/from a specific the UE to configure the UE; and [0118] -- a dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) for carrying user data to/from a specific the UE. [0119] Transport channels are used between the MAC and PHY layers and may be defined by how the information they carry is transmitted over the air interface. The set of transport channels defined by NR include, for example: [0120] -- a paging channel (PCH) for carrying paging messages that originated from the PCCH; [0121] -- a broadcast channel (BCH) for carrying the MIB from the BCCH; [0122] -- a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) for carrying downlink data and signaling messages, including the SIBs from the BCCH; [0123] -- an uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) for carrying uplink data and signaling messages; and [0124] -- a random access channel (RACH) for allowing a UE to contact the network without any prior scheduling. [0125] The PHY may use physical channels to pass information between processing levels of the PHY. A physical channel may have an associated set of time-frequency resources for carrying the information of one or more transport channels. The PHY may generate control information to support the low-level operation of the PHY and provide the control information to the lower levels of the PHY via physical control channels, known as L1/L2 control channels. The set of physical channels and physical control channels defined by NR include, for example: [0126] -- a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) for carrying the MIB from the BCH; [0127] -- a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) for carrying downlink data and signaling messages from the DL-SCH, as well as paging messages from the PCH; [0128] -- a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) for carrying downlink control information (DCI), which may include downlink scheduling commands, uplink scheduling grants, and uplink power control commands; [0129] -- a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) for carrying uplink data and signaling messages from the UL-SCH and in some instances uplink control information (UCI) as described below; [0130] -- a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) for carrying UCI, which may include HARQ acknowledgments, channel quality indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI), rank indicators (RI), and scheduling requests (SR); and [0131] -- a physical random access channel (PRACH) for random access. [0132] Similar to the physical control channels, the physical layer generates physical signals to support the low-level operation of the physical layer. As shown in FIG.5A and FIG.5B, the physical layer signals defined by NR include: primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), channel state information reference signals (CSI- RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), sounding reference signals (SRS), and phase- tracking reference signals (PT-RS). These physical layer signals will be described in greater detail below. [0133] FIG.2B illustrates an example NR control plane protocol stack. As shown in FIG. 2B, the NR control plane protocol stack may use the same/similar first four protocol layers as the example NR user plane protocol stack. These four protocol layers include the PHYs 211 and 221, the MACs 212 and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDCPs 214 and 224. Instead of having the SDAPs 215 and 225 at the top of the stack as in the NR user plane protocol stack, the NR control plane stack has radio resource controls (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217 and 237 at the top of the NR control plane protocol stack. [0134] The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g., the AMF 158A) or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the CN. The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages. There is no direct path between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 through which the NAS messages can be transported. The NAS messages may be transported using the AS of the Uu and NG interfaces. NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality such as authentication, security, connection setup, mobility management, and session management. [0135] The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the RAN. The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 via signaling messages, referred to as RRC messages. RRC messages may be transmitted between the UE 210 and the RAN using signaling radio bearers and the same/similar PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY protocol layers. The MAC may multiplex control-plane and user-plane data into the same transport block (TB). The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality such as: broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paging initiated by the CN or the RAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE 210 and the RAN; security functions including key management; establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radio bearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS management functions; the UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting; detection of and recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NAS message transfer. As part of establishing an RRC connection, RRCs 216 and 226 may establish an RRC context, which may involve configuring parameters for communication between the UE 210 and the RAN. [0136] FIG.6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE. The UE may be the same or similar to the wireless device 106 depicted in FIG.1A, the UE 210 depicted in FIG.2A and FIG.2B, or any other wireless device described in the present disclosure. As illustrated in FIG.6, a UE may be in at least one of three RRC states: RRC connected 602 (e.g., RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 604 (e.g., RRC_IDLE), and RRC inactive 606 (e.g., RRC_INACTIVE). [0137] In RRC connected 602, the UE has an established RRC context and may have at least one RRC connection with a base station. The base station may be similar to one of the one or more base stations included in the RAN 104 depicted in FIG.1A, one of the gNBs 160 or ng-eNBs 162 depicted in FIG.1B, the gNB 220 depicted in FIG.2A and FIG.2B, or any other base station described in the present disclosure. The base station with which the UE is connected may have the RRC context for the UE. The RRC context, referred to as the UE context, may comprise parameters for communication between the UE and the base station. These parameters may include, for example: one or more AS contexts; one or more radio link configuration parameters; bearer configuration information (e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session); security information; and/or PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information. While in RRC connected 602, mobility of the UE may be managed by the RAN (e.g., the RAN 104 or the NG-RAN 154). The UE may measure the signal levels (e.g., reference signal levels) from a serving cell and neighboring cells and report these measurements to the base station currently serving the UE. The UE’s serving base station may request a handover to a cell of one of the neighboring base stations based on the reported measurements. The RRC state may transition from RRC connected 602 to RRC idle 604 through a connection release procedure 608 or to RRC inactive 606 through a connection inactivation procedure 610. [0138] In RRC idle 604, an RRC context may not be established for the UE. In RRC idle 604, the UE may not have an RRC connection with the base station. While in RRC idle 604, the UE may be in a sleep state for the majority of the time (e.g., to conserve battery power). The UE may wake up periodically (e.g., once in every discontinuous reception cycle) to monitor for paging messages from the RAN. Mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through a procedure known as cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602 through a connection establishment procedure 612, which may involve a random access procedure as discussed in greater detail below. [0139] In RRC inactive 606, the RRC context previously established is maintained in the UE and the base station. This allows for a fast transition to RRC connected 602 with reduced signaling overhead as compared to the transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602. While in RRC inactive 606, the UE may be in a sleep state and mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from RRC inactive 606 to RRC connected 602 through a connection resume procedure 614 or to RRC idle 604 though a connection release procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar to connection release procedure 608. [0140] An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism. In RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606, mobility is managed by the UE through cell reselection. The purpose of mobility management in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 is to allow the network to be able to notify the UE of an event via a paging message without having to broadcast the paging message over the entire mobile communications network. The mobility management mechanism used in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 may allow the network to track the UE on a cell-group level so that the paging message may be broadcast over the cells of the cell group that the UE currently resides within instead of the entire mobile communication network. The mobility management mechanisms for RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 track the UE on a cell-group level. They may do so using different granularities of grouping. For example, there may be three levels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within a RAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within a group of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by a tracking area identifier (TAI). [0141] Tracking areas may be used to track the UE at the CN level. The CN (e.g., the CN 102 or the 5G-CN 152) may provide the UE with a list of TAIs associated with a UE registration area. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell associated with a TAI not included in the list of TAIs associated with the UE registration area, the UE may perform a registration update with the CN to allow the CN to update the UE’s location and provide the UE with a new the UE registration area. [0142] RAN areas may be used to track the UE at the RAN level. For a UE in RRC inactive 606 state, the UE may be assigned a RAN notification area. A RAN notification area may comprise one or more cell identities, a list of RAIs, or a list of TAIs. In an example, a base station may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. In an example, a cell may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell not included in the RAN notification area assigned to the UE, the UE may perform a notification area update with the RAN to update the UE’s RAN notification area. [0143] A base station storing an RRC context for a UE or a last serving base station of the UE may be referred to as an anchor base station. An anchor base station may maintain an RRC context for the UE at least during a period of time that the UE stays in a RAN notification area of the anchor base station and/or during a period of time that the UE stays in RRC inactive 606. [0144] A gNB, such as gNBs 160 in FIG.1B, may be split in two parts: a central unit (gNB- CU), and one or more distributed units (gNB-DU). A gNB-CU may be coupled to one or more gNB-DUs using an F1 interface. The gNB-CU may comprise the RRC, the PDCP, and the SDAP. A gNB-DU may comprise the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY. [0145] In NR, the physical signals and physical channels (discussed with respect to FIG.5A and FIG.5B) may be mapped onto orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. OFDM is a multicarrier communication scheme that transmits data over F orthogonal subcarriers (or tones). Before transmission, the data may be mapped to a series of complex symbols (e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) or M-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols), referred to as source symbols, and divided into F parallel symbol streams. The F parallel symbol streams may be treated as though they are in the frequency domain and used as inputs to an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) block that transforms them into the time domain. The IFFT block may take in F source symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbol streams, and use each source symbol to modulate the amplitude and phase of one of F sinusoidal basis functions that correspond to the F orthogonal subcarriers. The output of the IFFT block may be F time-domain samples that represent the summation of the F orthogonal subcarriers. The F time-domain samples may form a single OFDM symbol. After some processing (e.g., addition of a cyclic prefix) and up-conversion, an OFDM symbol provided by the IFFT block may be transmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency. The F parallel symbol streams may be mixed using an FFT block before being processed by the IFFT block. This operation produces Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by UEs in the uplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio (PAPR). Inverse processing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at a receiver using an FFT block to recover the data mapped to the source symbols. [0146] FIG.7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped. An NR frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN). The SFN may repeat with a period of 1024 frames. As illustrated, one NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms) in duration and may include 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration. A subframe may be divided into slots that include, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot. [0147] The duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDM symbols of the slot. In NR, a flexible numerology is supported to accommodate different cell deployments (e.g., cells with carrier frequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in the mm-wave range). A numerology may be defined in terms of subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration. For a numerology in NR, subcarrier spacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baseline subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz, and cyclic prefix durations may be scaled down by powers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 μs. For example, NR defines numerologies with the following subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 μs; 30 kHz/2.3 μs; 60 kHz/1.2 μs; 120 kHz/0.59 μs; and 240 kHz/0.29 μs. [0148] A slot may have a fixed number of OFDM symbols (e.g., 14 OFDM symbols). A numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing has a shorter slot duration and, correspondingly, more slots per subframe. FIG.7 illustrates this numerology-dependent slot duration and slots- per-subframe transmission structure (the numerology with a subcarrier spacing of 240 kHz is not shown in FIG.7 for ease of illustration). A subframe in NR may be used as a numerology- independent time reference, while a slot may be used as the unit upon which uplink and downlink transmissions are scheduled. To support low latency, scheduling in NR may be decoupled from the slot duration and start at any OFDM symbol and last for as many symbols as needed for a transmission. These partial slot transmissions may be referred to as mini-slot or subslot transmissions. [0149] FIG.8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier. The slot includes resource elements (REs) and resource blocks (RBs). An RE is the smallest physical resource in NR. An RE spans one OFDM symbol in the time domain by one subcarrier in the frequency domain as shown in FIG.8. An RB spans twelve consecutive REs in the frequency domain as shown in FIG.8. An NR carrier may be limited to a width of 275 RBs or 275×12 = 3300 subcarriers. Such a limitation, if used, may limit the NR carrier to 50, 100, 200, and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz, respectively, where the 400 MHz bandwidth may be set based on a 400 MHz per carrier bandwidth limit. [0150] FIG.8 illustrates a single numerology being used across the entire bandwidth of the NR carrier. In other example configurations, multiple numerologies may be supported on the same carrier. [0151] NR may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g., up to 400 MHz for a subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all UEs may be able to receive the full carrier bandwidth (e.g., due to hardware limitations). Also, receiving the full carrier bandwidth may be prohibitive in terms of UE power consumption. In an example, to reduce power consumption and/or for other purposes, a UE may adapt the size of the UE’s receive bandwidth based on the amount of traffic the UE is scheduled to receive. This is referred to as bandwidth adaptation. [0152] NR defines bandwidth parts (BWPs) to support UEs not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth and to support bandwidth adaptation. In an example, a BWP may be defined by a subset of contiguous RBs on a carrier. A UE may be configured (e.g., via RRC layer) with one or more downlink BWPs and one or more uplink BWPs per serving cell (e.g., up to four downlink BWPs and up to four uplink BWPs per serving cell). At a given time, one or more of the configured BWPs for a serving cell may be active. These one or more BWPs may be referred to as active BWPs of the serving cell. When a serving cell is configured with a secondary uplink carrier, the serving cell may have one or more first active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second active BWPs in the secondary uplink carrier. [0153] For unpaired spectra, a downlink BWP from a set of configured downlink BWPs may be linked with an uplink BWP from a set of configured uplink BWPs if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP index of the uplink BWP are the same. For unpaired spectra, a UE may expect that a center frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as a center frequency for an uplink BWP. [0154] For a downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs on a primary cell (PCell), a base station may configure a UE with one or more control resource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space. A search space is a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the UE may find control information. The search space may be a UE-specific search space or a common search space (potentially usable by a plurality of UEs). For example, a base station may configure a UE with a common search space, on a PCell or on a primary secondary cell (PSCell), in an active downlink BWP. [0155] For an uplink BWP in a set of configured uplink BWPs, a BS may configure a UE with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCCH transmissions. A UE may receive downlink receptions (e.g., PDCCH or PDSCH) in a downlink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration) for the downlink BWP. The UE may transmit uplink transmissions (e.g., PUCCH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP). [0156] One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided in Downlink Control Information (DCI). A value of a BWP indicator field may indicate which BWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for one or more downlink receptions. The value of the one or more BWP indicator fields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplink transmissions. [0157] A base station may semi-statically configure a UE with a default downlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associated with a PCell. If the base station does not provide the default downlink BWP to the UE, the default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlink BWP. The UE may determine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP based on a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH. [0158] A base station may configure a UE with a BWP inactivity timer value for a PCell. The UE may start or restart a BWP inactivity timer at any appropriate time. For example, the UE may start or restart the BWP inactivity timer (a) when the UE detects a DCI indicating an active downlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectra operation; or (b) when a UE detects a DCI indicating an active downlink BWP or active uplink BWP other than a default downlink BWP or uplink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation. If the UE does not detect DCI during an interval of time (e.g., 1 ms or 0.5 ms), the UE may run the BWP inactivity timer toward expiration (for example, increment from zero to the BWP inactivity timer value, or decrement from the BWP inactivity timer value to zero). When the BWP inactivity timer expires, the UE may switch from the active downlink BWP to the default downlink BWP. [0159] In an example, a base station may semi-statically configure a UE with one or more BWPs. A UE may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP in response to receiving a DCI indicating the second BWP as an active BWP and/or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivity timer (e.g., if the second BWP is the default BWP). [0160] Downlink and uplink BWP switching (where BWP switching refers to switching from a currently active BWP to a not currently active BWP) may be performed independently in paired spectra. In unpaired spectra, downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed simultaneously. Switching between configured BWPs may occur based on RRC signaling, DCI, expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation of random access. [0161] FIG.9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier. A UE configured with the three BWPs may switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point. In the example illustrated in FIG.9, the BWPs include: a BWP 902 with a bandwidth of 40 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 with a bandwidth of 10 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906 with a bandwidth of 20 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. The BWP 902 may be an initial active BWP, and the BWP 904 may be a default BWP. The UE may switch between BWPs at switching points. In the example of FIG.9, the UE may switch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switching point 908. The switching at the switching point 908 may occur for any suitable reason, for example, in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer (indicating switching to the default BWP) and/or in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 910 from active BWP 904 to BWP 906 in response receiving a DCI indicating BWP 906 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 912 from active BWP 906 to BWP 904 in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer and/or in response receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 914 from active BWP 904 to BWP 902 in response receiving a DCI indicating BWP 902 as the active BWP. [0162] If a UE is configured for a secondary cell with a default downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs and a timer value, UE procedures for switching BWPs on a secondary cell may be the same/similar as those on a primary cell. For example, the UE may use the timer value and the default downlink BWP for the secondary cell in the same/similar manner as the UE would use these values for a primary cell. [0163] To provide for greater data rates, two or more carriers can be aggregated and simultaneously transmitted to/from the same UE using carrier aggregation (CA). The aggregated carriers in CA may be referred to as component carriers (CCs). When CA is used, there are a number of serving cells for the UE, one for a CC. The CCs may have three configurations in the frequency domain. [0164] FIG.10A illustrates the three CA configurations with two CCs. In the intraband, contiguous configuration 1002, the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are located directly adjacent to each other within the frequency band. In the intraband, non-contiguous configuration 1004, the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are separated in the frequency band by a gap. In the interband configuration 1006, the two CCs are located in frequency bands (frequency band A and frequency band B). [0165] In an example, up to 32 CCs may be aggregated. The aggregated CCs may have the same or different bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/or duplexing schemes (TDD or FDD). A serving cell for a UE using CA may have a downlink CC. For FDD, one or more uplink CCs may be optionally configured for a serving cell. The ability to aggregate more downlink carriers than uplink carriers may be useful, for example, when the UE has more data traffic in the downlink than in the uplink. [0166] When CA is used, one of the aggregated cells for a UE may be referred to as a primary cell (PCell). The PCell may be the serving cell that the UE initially connects to at RRC connection establishment, reestablishment, and/or handover. The PCell may provide the UE with NAS mobility information and the security input. UEs may have different PCells. In the downlink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the downlink primary CC (DL PCC). In the uplink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC (UL PCC). The other aggregated cells for the UE may be referred to as secondary cells (SCells). In an example, the SCells may be configured after the PCell is configured for the UE. For example, an SCell may be configured through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. In the downlink, the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as a downlink secondary CC (DL SCC). In the uplink, the carrier corresponding to the SCell may be referred to as the uplink secondary CC (UL SCC). [0167] Configured SCells for a UE may be activated and deactivated based on, for example, traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of an SCell may mean that PDCCH and PDSCH reception on the SCell is stopped and PUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell are stopped. Configured SCells may be activated and deactivated using a MAC CE with respect to FIG.4B. For example, a MAC CE may use a bitmap (e.g., one bit per SCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in a subset of configured SCells) for the UE are activated or deactivated. Configured SCells may be deactivated in response to an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer (e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell). [0168] Downlink control information, such as scheduling assignments and scheduling grants, for a cell may be transmitted on the cell corresponding to the assignments and grants, which is known as self-scheduling. The DCI for the cell may be transmitted on another cell, which is known as cross-carrier scheduling. Uplink control information (e.g., HARQ acknowledgments and channel state feedback, such as CQI, PMI, and/or RI) for aggregated cells may be transmitted on the PUCCH of the PCell. For a larger number of aggregated downlink CCs, the PUCCH of the PCell may become overloaded. Cells may be divided into multiple PUCCH groups. [0169] FIG.10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups. A PUCCH group 1010 and a PUCCH group 1050 may include one or more downlink CCs, respectively. In the example of FIG.10B, the PUCCH group 1010 includes three downlink CCs: a PCell 1011, an SCell 1012, and an SCell 1013. The PUCCH group 1050 includes three downlink CCs in the present example: a PCell 1051, an SCell 1052, and an SCell 1053. One or more uplink CCs may be configured as a PCell 1021, an SCell 1022, and an SCell 1023. One or more other uplink CCs may be configured as a primary SCell (PSCell) 1061, an SCell 1062, and an SCell 1063. Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1010, shown as UCI 1031, UCI 1032, and UCI 1033, may be transmitted in the uplink of the PCell 1021. Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1050, shown as UCI 1071, UCI 1072, and UCI 1073, may be transmitted in the uplink of the PSCell 1061. In an example, if the aggregated cells depicted in FIG.10B were not divided into the PUCCH group 1010 and the PUCCH group 1050, a single uplink PCell to transmit UCI relating to the downlink CCs, and the PCell may become overloaded. By dividing transmissions of UCI between the PCell 1021 and the PSCell 1061, overloading may be prevented. [0170] A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier, may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cell index. The physical cell ID or the cell index may identify a downlink carrier and/or an uplink carrier of the cell, for example, depending on the context in which the physical cell ID is used. A physical cell ID may be determined using a synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink component carrier. A cell index may be determined using RRC messages. In the disclosure, a physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID, and a cell index may be referred to as a carrier index. For example, when the disclosure refers to a first physical cell ID for a first downlink carrier, the disclosure may mean the first physical cell ID is for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier. The same/similar concept may apply to, for example, a carrier activation. When the disclosure indicates that a first carrier is activated, the specification may mean that a cell comprising the first carrier is activated. [0171] In CA, a multi-carrier nature of a PHY may be exposed to a MAC. In an example, a HARQ entity may operate on a serving cell. A transport block may be generated per assignment/grant per serving cell. A transport block and potential HARQ retransmissions of the transport block may be mapped to a serving cell. [0172] In the downlink, a base station may transmit (e.g., unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast) one or more Reference Signals (RSs) to a UE (e.g., PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DMRS, and/or PT-RS, as shown in FIG.5A). In the uplink, the UE may transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g., DMRS, PT-RS, and/or SRS, as shown in FIG.5B). The PSS and the SSS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to synchronize the UE to the base station. The PSS and the SSS may be provided in a synchronization signal (SS) / physical broadcast channel (PBCH) block that includes the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH. The base station may periodically transmit a burst of SS/PBCH blocks. [0173] FIG.11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block's structure and location. A burst of SS/PBCH blocks may include one or more SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., 4 SS/PBCH blocks, as shown in FIG.11A). Bursts may be transmitted periodically (e.g., every 2 frames or 20 ms). A burst may be restricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame having a duration of 5 ms). It will be understood that FIG.11A is an example, and that these parameters (number of SS/PBCH blocks per burst, periodicity of bursts, position of burst within the frame) may be configured based on, for example: a carrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBCH block is transmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; a configuration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); or any other suitable factor. In an example, the UE may assume a subcarrier spacing for the SS/PBCH block based on the carrier frequency being monitored, unless the radio network configured the UE to assume a different subcarrier spacing. [0174] The SS/PBCH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain (e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in the example of FIG.11A) and may span one or more subcarriers in the frequency domain (e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers). The PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common center frequency. The PSS may be transmitted first and may span, for example, 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The SSS may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., two symbols later) and may span 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The PBCH may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., across the next 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240 subcarriers. [0175] The location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains may not be known to the UE (e.g., if the UE is searching for the cell). To find and select the cell, the UE may monitor a carrier for the PSS. For example, the UE may monitor a frequency location within the carrier. If the PSS is not found after a certain duration (e.g., 20 ms), the UE may search for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier, as indicated by a synchronization raster. If the PSS is found at a location in the time and frequency domains, the UE may determine, based on a known structure of the SS/PBCH block, the locations of the SSS and the PBCH, respectively. The SS/PBCH block may be a cell-defining SS block (CD-SSB). In an example, a primary cell may be associated with a CD-SSB. The CD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster. In an example, a cell selection/search and/or reselection may be based on the CD-SSB. [0176] The SS/PBCH block may be used by the UE to determine one or more parameters of the cell. For example, the UE may determine a physical cell identifier (PCI) of the cell based on the sequences of the PSS and the SSS, respectively. The UE may determine a location of a frame boundary of the cell based on the location of the SS/PBCH block. For example, the SS/PBCH block may indicate that it has been transmitted in accordance with a transmission pattern, wherein a SS/PBCH block in the transmission pattern is a known distance from the frame boundary. [0177] The PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and may use forward error correction (FEC). The FEC may use polar coding. One or more symbols spanned by the PBCH may carry one or more DMRSs for demodulation of the PBCH. The PBCH may include an indication of a current system frame number (SFN) of the cell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parameters may facilitate time synchronization of the UE to the base station. The PBCH may include a master information block (MIB) used to provide the UE with one or more parameters. The MIB may be used by the UE to locate remaining minimum system information (RMSI) associated with the cell. The RMSI may include a System Information Block Type 1 (SIB1). The SIB1 may contain information needed by the UE to access the cell. The UE may use one or more parameters of the MIB to monitor PDCCH, which may be used to schedule PDSCH. The PDSCH may include the SIB1. The SIB1 may be decoded using parameters provided in the MIB. The PBCH may indicate an absence of SIB1. Based on the PBCH indicating the absence of SIB1, the UE may be pointed to a frequency. The UE may search for an SS/PBCH block at the frequency to which the UE is pointed. [0178] The UE may assume that one or more SS/PBCH blocks transmitted with a same SS/PBCH block index are quasi co-located (QCLed) (e.g., having the same/similar Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rx parameters). The UE may not assume QCL for SS/PBCH block transmissions having different SS/PBCH block indices. [0179] SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., those within a half-frame) may be transmitted in spatial directions (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of the cell). In an example, a first SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a first spatial direction using a first beam, and a second SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam. [0180] In an example, within a frequency span of a carrier, a base station may transmit a plurality of SS/PBCH blocks. In an example, a first PCI of a first SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be different from a second PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks. The PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks transmitted in different frequency locations may be different or the same. [0181] The CSI-RS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to acquire channel state information (CSI). The base station may configure the UE with one or more CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any other suitable purpose. The base station may configure a UE with one or more of the same/similar CSI-RSs. The UE may measure the one or more CSI-RSs. The UE may estimate a downlink channel state and/or generate a CSI report based on the measuring of the one or more downlink CSI-RSs. The UE may provide the CSI report to the base station. The base station may use feedback provided by the UE (e.g., the estimated downlink channel state) to perform link adaptation. [0182] The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more CSI-RS resource sets. A CSI-RS resource may be associated with a location in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity. The base station may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RS resource. The base station may indicate to the UE that a CSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set is activated and/or deactivated. [0183] The base station may configure the UE to report CSI measurements. The base station may configure the UE to provide CSI reports periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently. For periodic CSI reporting, the UE may be configured with a timing and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSI reports. For aperiodic CSI reporting, the base station may request a CSI report. For example, the base station may command the UE to measure a configured CSI-RS resource and provide a CSI report relating to the measurements. For semi-persistent CSI reporting, the base station may configure the UE to transmit periodically, and selectively activate or deactivate the periodic reporting. The base station may configure the UE with a CSI-RS resource set and CSI reports using RRC signaling. [0184] The CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating, for example, up to 32 antenna ports. The UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a control resource set (CORESET) when the downlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of the physical resource blocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET. The UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks when the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks. [0185] Downlink DMRSs may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for channel estimation. For example, the downlink DMRS may be used for coherent demodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH). An NR network may support one or more variable and/or configurable DMRS patterns for data demodulation. At least one downlink DMRS configuration may support a front-loaded DMRS pattern. A front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi-statically configure the UE with a number (e.g. a maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for PDSCH. A DMRS configuration may support one or more DMRS ports. For example, for single user-MIMO, a DMRS configuration may support up to eight orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. For multiuser-MIMO, a DMRS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. A radio network may support (e.g., at least for CP-OFDM) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence may be the same or different. The base station may transmit a downlink DMRS and a corresponding PDSCH using the same precoding matrix. The UE may use the one or more downlink DMRSs for coherent demodulation/channel estimation of the PDSCH. [0186] In an example, a transmitter (e.g., a base station) may use a precoder matrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth. For example, the transmitter may use a first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and a second precoder matrix for a second bandwidth. The first precoder matrix and the second precoder matrix may be different based on the first bandwidth being different from the second bandwidth. The UE may assume that a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs. The set of PRBs may be denoted as a precoding resource block group (PRG). [0187] A PDSCH may comprise one or more layers. The UE may assume that at least one symbol with DMRS is present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PDSCH. A higher layer may configure up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH. [0188] Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for phase- noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS is present or not may depend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/or pattern of the downlink PT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis using a combination of RRC signaling and/or an association with one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., modulation and coding scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of a downlink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. An NR network may support a plurality of PT-RS densities defined in the time and/or frequency domains. When present, a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource. Downlink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE. Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted on symbols to facilitate phase tracking at the receiver. [0189] The UE may transmit an uplink DMRS to a base station for channel estimation. For example, the base station may use the uplink DMRS for coherent demodulation of one or more uplink physical channels. For example, the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS with a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequencies that is similar to a range of frequencies associated with the corresponding physical channel. The base station may configure the UE with one or more uplink DMRS configurations. At least one DMRS configuration may support a front-loaded DMRS pattern. The front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). One or more uplink DMRSs may be configured to transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with a number (e.g. maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which the UE may use to schedule a single-symbol DMRS and/or a double-symbol DMRS. An NR network may support (e.g., for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP- OFDM)) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence for the DMRS may be the same or different. [0190] A PUSCH may comprise one or more layers, and the UE may transmit at least one symbol with DMRS present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PUSCH. In an example, a higher layer may configure up to three DMRSs for the PUSCH. [0191] Uplink PT-RS (which may be used by a base station for phase tracking and/or phase- noise compensation) may or may not be present depending on an RRC configuration of the UE. The presence and/or pattern of uplink PT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis by a combination of RRC signaling and/or one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. A radio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined in time/frequency domain. When present, a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource. For example, uplink PT- RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE. [0192] SRS may be transmitted by a UE to a base station for channel state estimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/or link adaptation. SRS transmitted by the UE may allow a base station to estimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies. A scheduler at the base station may employ the estimated uplink channel state to assign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCH transmission from the UE. The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station may configure the UE with one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource set applicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter. For example, when a higher layer parameter indicates beam management, an SRS resource in a SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets (e.g., with the same/similar time domain behavior, periodic, aperiodic, and/or the like) may be transmitted at a time instant (e.g., simultaneously). The UE may transmit one or more SRS resources in SRS resource sets. An NR network may support aperiodic, periodic and/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions. The UE may transmit SRS resources based on one or more trigger types, wherein the one or more trigger types may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or more DCI formats. In an example, at least one DCI format may be employed for the UE to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resource sets. An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on a higher layer signaling. An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggered based on one or more DCI formats. In an example, when PUSCH and SRS are transmitted in a same slot, the UE may be configured to transmit SRS after a transmission of a PUSCH and a corresponding uplink DMRS. [0193] The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one of following: a SRS resource configuration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domain behavior of an SRS resource configuration (e.g., an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, mini-slot, and/or subframe level periodicity; offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodic SRS resource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a starting OFDM symbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hopping bandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID. [0194] An antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. If a first symbol and a second symbol are transmitted on the same antenna port, the receiver may infer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like) for conveying the second symbol on the antenna port, from the channel for conveying the first symbol on the antenna port. A first antenna port and a second antenna port may be referred to as quasi co-located (QCLed) if one or more large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel over which a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed. The one or more large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; an average gain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx) parameters. [0195] Channels that use beamforming require beam management. Beam management may comprise beam measurement, beam selection, and beam indication. A beam may be associated with one or more reference signals. For example, a beam may be identified by one or more beamformed reference signals. The UE may perform downlink beam measurement based on downlink reference signals (e.g., a channel state information reference signal (CSI- RS)) and generate a beam measurement report. The UE may perform the downlink beam measurement procedure after an RRC connection is set up with a base station. [0196] FIG.11B illustrates an example of channel state information reference signals (CSI- RSs) that are mapped in the time and frequency domains. A square shown in FIG.11B may span a resource block (RB) within a bandwidth of a cell. A base station may transmit one or more RRC messages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicating one or more CSI-RSs. One or more of the following parameters may be configured by higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC and/or MAC signaling) for a CSI-RS resource configuration: a CSI-RS resource configuration identity, a number of CSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g., symbol and resource element (RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframe configuration (e.g., subframe location, offset, and periodicity in a radio frame), a CSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, a code division multiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, a transmission comb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g., QCL- scramblingidentity, crs-portscount, mbsfn-subframeconfiglist, csi-rs-configZPid, qcl-csi-rs- configNZPid), and/or other radio resource parameters. [0197] The three beams illustrated in FIG.11B may be configured for a UE in a UE-specific configuration. Three beams are illustrated in FIG.11B (beam #1, beam #2, and beam #3), more or fewer beams may be configured. Beam #1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol. Beam #2 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1102 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a second symbol. Beam #3 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1103 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a third symbol. By using frequency division multiplexing (FDM), a base station may use other subcarriers in a same RB (for example, those that are not used to transmit CSI-RS 1101) to transmit another CSI-RS associated with a beam for another UE. By using time domain multiplexing (TDM), beams used for the UE may be configured such that beams for the UE use symbols from beams of other UEs. [0198] CSI-RSs such as those illustrated in FIG.11B (e.g., CSI-RS 1101, 1102, 1103) may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE for one or more measurements. For example, the UE may measure a reference signal received power (RSRP) of configured CSI- RS resources. The base station may configure the UE with a reporting configuration and the UE may report the RSRP measurements to a network (for example, via one or more base stations) based on the reporting configuration. In an example, the base station may determine, based on the reported measurement results, one or more transmission configuration indication (TCI) states comprising a number of reference signals. In an example, the base station may indicate one or more TCI states to the UE (e.g., via RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and/or a DCI). The UE may receive a downlink transmission with a receive (Rx) beam determined based on the one or more TCI states. In an example, the UE may or may not have a capability of beam correspondence. If the UE has the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may determine a spatial domain filter of a transmit (Tx) beam based on a spatial domain filter of the corresponding Rx beam. If the UE does not have the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may perform an uplink beam selection procedure to determine the spatial domain filter of the Tx beam. The UE may perform the uplink beam selection procedure based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS) resources configured to the UE by the base station. The base station may select and indicate uplink beams for the UE based on measurements of the one or more SRS resources transmitted by the UE. [0199] In a beam management procedure, a UE may assess (e.g., measure) a channel quality of one or more beam pair links, a beam pair link comprising a transmitting beam transmitted by a base station and a receiving beam received by the UE. Based on the assessment, the UE may transmit a beam measurement report indicating one or more beam pair quality parameters comprising, e.g., one or more beam identifications (e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like), RSRP, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI), and/or a rank indicator (RI). [0200] FIG.12A illustrates examples of three downlink beam management procedures: P1, P2, and P3. Procedure P1 may enable a UE measurement on transmit (Tx) beams of a transmission reception point (TRP) (or multiple TRPs), e.g., to support a selection of one or more base station Tx beams and/or UE Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of P1). Beamforming at a TRP may comprise a Tx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Beamforming at a UE may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure P2 may be used to enable a UE measurement on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row of P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). The UE and/or the base station may perform procedure P2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement. The UE may perform procedure P3 for Rx beam determination by using the same Tx beam at the base station and sweeping an Rx beam at the UE. [0201] FIG.12B illustrates examples of three uplink beam management procedures: U1, U2, and U3. Procedure U1 may be used to enable a base station to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a UE, e.g., to support a selection of one or more UE Tx beams and/or base station Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of U1). Beamforming at the UE may include, e.g., a Tx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown in the bottom rows of U1 and U3 as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Beamforming at the base station may include, e.g., an Rx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure U2 may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam when the UE uses a fixed Tx beam. The UE and/or the base station may perform procedure U2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement The UE may perform procedure U3 to adjust its Tx beam when the base station uses a fixed Rx beam. [0202] A UE may initiate a beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure based on detecting a beam failure. The UE may transmit a BFR request (e.g., a preamble, a UCI, an SR, a MAC CE, and/or the like) based on the initiating of the BFR procedure. The UE may detect the beam failure based on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) of an associated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g., having an error rate higher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lower than a received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/or the like). [0203] The UE may measure a quality of a beam pair link using one or more reference signals (RSs) comprising one or more SS/PBCH blocks, one or more CSI-RS resources, and/or one or more demodulation reference signals (DMRSs). A quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more of a block error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) value, a reference signal received quality (RSRQ) value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources. The base station may indicate that an RS resource is quasi co-located (QCLed) with one or more DM-RSs of a channel (e.g., a control channel, a shared data channel, and/or the like). The RS resource and the one or more DMRSs of the channel may be QCLed when the channel characteristics (e.g., Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like) from a transmission via the RS resource to the UE are similar or the same as the channel characteristics from a transmission via the channel to the UE. [0204] A network (e.g., a gNB and/or an ng-eNB of a network) and/or the UE may initiate a random access procedure. A UE in an RRC_IDLE state and/or an RRC_INACTIVE state may initiate the random access procedure to request a connection setup to a network. The UE may initiate the random access procedure from an RRC_CONNECTED state. The UE may initiate the random access procedure to request uplink resources (e.g., for uplink transmission of an SR when there is no PUCCH resource available) and/or acquire uplink timing (e.g., when uplink synchronization status is non-synchronized). The UE may initiate the random access procedure to request one or more system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g., other system information such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like). The UE may initiate the random access procedure for a beam failure recovery request. A network may initiate a random access procedure for a handover and/or for establishing time alignment for an SCell addition. [0205] FIG.13A illustrates a four-step contention-based random access procedure. Prior to initiation of the procedure, a base station may transmit a configuration message 1310 to the UE. The procedure illustrated in FIG.13A comprises transmission of four messages: a Msg 1 1311, a Msg 21312, a Msg 31313, and a Msg 41314. The Msg 11311 may include and/or be referred to as a preamble (or a random access preamble). The Msg 21312 may include and/or be referred to as a random access response (RAR). [0206] The configuration message 1310 may be transmitted, for example, using one or more RRC messages. The one or more RRC messages may indicate one or more random access channel (RACH) parameters to the UE. The one or more RACH parameters may comprise at least one of following: general parameters for one or more random access procedures (e.g., RACH-configGeneral); cell-specific parameters (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon); and/or dedicated parameters (e.g., RACH-configDedicated). The base station may broadcast or multicast the one or more RRC messages to one or more UEs. The one or more RRC messages may be UE-specific (e.g., dedicated RRC messages transmitted to a UE in an RRC_CONNECTED state and/or in an RRC_INACTIVE state). The UE may determine, based on the one or more RACH parameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplink transmit power for transmission of the Msg 11311 and/or the Msg 31313. Based on the one or more RACH parameters, the UE may determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the Msg 21312 and the Msg 41314. [0207] The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH (PRACH) occasions available for transmission of the Msg 11311. The one or more PRACH occasions may be predefined. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more available sets of one or more PRACH occasions (e.g., prach-ConfigIndex). The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more PRACH occasions and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more preambles and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or more reference signals may be SS/PBCH blocks and/or CSI-RSs. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a number of SS/PBCH blocks mapped to a PRACH occasion and/or a number of preambles mapped to a SS/PBCH blocks. [0208] The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmit power of Msg 11311 and/or Msg 31313. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a reference power for a preamble transmission (e.g., a received target power and/or an initial power of the preamble transmission). There may be one or more power offsets indicated by the one or more RACH parameters. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a power ramping step; a power offset between SSB and CSI-RS; a power offset between transmissions of the Msg 11311 and the Msg 31313; and/or a power offset value between preamble groups. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds based on which the UE may determine at least one reference signal (e.g., an SSB and/or CSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g., a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier). [0209] The Msg 11311 may include one or more preamble transmissions (e.g., a preamble transmission and one or more preamble retransmissions). An RRC message may be used to configure one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and/or group B). A preamble group may comprise one or more preambles. The UE may determine the preamble group based on a pathloss measurement and/or a size of the Msg 31313. The UE may measure an RSRP of one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) and determine at least one reference signal having an RSRP above an RSRP threshold (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/or rsrp- ThresholdCSI-RS). The UE may select at least one preamble associated with the one or more reference signals and/or a selected preamble group, for example, if the association between the one or more preambles and the at least one reference signal is configured by an RRC message. [0210] The UE may determine the preamble based on the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310. For example, the UE may determine the preamble based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRP measurement, and/or a size of the Msg 31313. As another example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximum number of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholds for determining one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and group B). A base station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure the UE with an association between one or more preambles and one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs). If the association is configured, the UE may determine the preamble to include in Msg 11311 based on the association. The Msg 11311 may be transmitted to the base station via one or more PRACH occasions. The UE may use one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI- RSs) for selection of the preamble and for determining of the PRACH occasion. One or more RACH parameters (e.g., ra-ssb-OccasionMskIndex and/or ra-OccasionList) may indicate an association between the PRACH occasions and the one or more reference signals. [0211] The UE may perform a preamble retransmission if no response is received following a preamble transmission. The UE may increase an uplink transmit power for the preamble retransmission. The UE may select an initial preamble transmit power based on a pathloss measurement and/or a target received preamble power configured by the network. The UE may determine to retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmit power. The UE may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g., PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preamble retransmission. The ramping step may be an amount of incremental increase in uplink transmit power for a retransmission. The UE may ramp up the uplink transmit power if the UE determines a reference signal (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS) that is the same as a previous preamble transmission. The UE may count a number of preamble transmissions and/or retransmissions (e.g., PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER). The UE may determine that a random access procedure completed unsuccessfully, for example, if the number of preamble transmissions exceeds a threshold configured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g., preambleTransMax). [0212] The Msg 21312 received by the UE may include an RAR. In some scenarios, the Msg 21312 may include multiple RARs corresponding to multiple UEs. The Msg 21312 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 11311. The Msg 21312 may be scheduled on the DL-SCH and indicated on a PDCCH using a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI). The Msg 21312 may indicate that the Msg 11311 was received by the base station. The Msg 21312 may include a time-alignment command that may be used by the UE to adjust the UE’s transmission timing, a scheduling grant for transmission of the Msg 31313, and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI). After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the Msg 21312. The UE may determine when to start the time window based on a PRACH occasion that the UE uses to transmit the preamble. For example, the UE may start the time window one or more symbols after a last symbol of the preamble (e.g., at a first PDCCH occasion from an end of a preamble transmission). The one or more symbols may be determined based on a numerology. The PDCCH may be in a common search space (e.g., a Type1-PDCCH common search space) configured by an RRC message. The UE may identify the RAR based on a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI). RNTIs may be used depending on one or more events initiating the random access procedure. The UE may use random access RNTI (RA-RNTI). The RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions in which the UE transmits a preamble. For example, the UE may determine the RA-RNTI based on: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index; and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions. An example of RA-RNTI may be as follows: RA-RNTI= 1 + s_id + 14 × t_id + 14 × 80 × f_id + 14 × 80 × 8 × ul_carrier_id, where s_id may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g., 0 ≤ s_id < 14), t_id may be an index of a first slot of the PRACH occasion in a system frame (e.g., 0 ≤ t_id < 80), f_id may be an index of the PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0 ≤ f_id < 8), and ul_carrier_id may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission (e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier). [0213] The UE may transmit the Msg 31313 in response to a successful reception of the Msg 21312 (e.g., using resources identified in the Msg 21312). The Msg 31313 may be used for contention resolution in, for example, the contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG.13A. In some scenarios, a plurality of UEs may transmit a same preamble to a base station and the base station may provide an RAR that corresponds to a UE. Collisions may occur if the plurality of UEs interpret the RAR as corresponding to themselves. Contention resolution (e.g., using the Msg 31313 and the Msg 41314) may be used to increase the likelihood that the UE does not incorrectly use an identity of another the UE. To perform contention resolution, the UE may include a device identifier in the Msg 3 1313 (e.g., a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC-RNTI included in the Msg 21312, and/or any other suitable identifier). [0214] The Msg 41314 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 3 1313. If a C-RNTI was included in the Msg 31313, the base station will address the UE on the PDCCH using the C-RNTI. If the UE's unique C-RNTI is detected on the PDCCH, the random access procedure is determined to be successfully completed. If a TC-RNTI is included in the Msg 31313 (e.g., if the UE is in an RRC_IDLE state or not otherwise connected to the base station), Msg 41314 will be received using a DL-SCH associated with the TC-RNTI. If a MAC PDU is successfully decoded and a MAC PDU comprises the UE contention resolution identity MAC CE that matches or otherwise corresponds with the CCCH SDU sent (e.g., transmitted) in Msg 31313, the UE may determine that the contention resolution is successful and/or the UE may determine that the random access procedure is successfully completed. [0215] The UE may be configured with a supplementary uplink (SUL) carrier and a normal uplink (NUL) carrier. An initial access (e.g., random access procedure) may be supported in an uplink carrier. For example, a base station may configure the UE with two separate RACH configurations: one for an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier. For random access in a cell configured with an SUL carrier, the network may indicate which carrier to use (NUL or SUL). The UE may determine the SUL carrier, for example, if a measured quality of one or more reference signals is lower than a broadcast threshold. Uplink transmissions of the random access procedure (e.g., the Msg 11311 and/or the Msg 31313) may remain on the selected carrier. The UE may switch an uplink carrier during the random access procedure (e.g., between the Msg 11311 and the Msg 31313) in one or more cases. For example, the UE may determine and/or switch an uplink carrier for the Msg 11311 and/or the Msg 31313 based on a channel clear assessment (e.g., a listen-before-talk). [0216] FIG.13B illustrates a two-step contention-free random access procedure. Similar to the four-step contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG.13A, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1320 to the UE. The configuration message 1320 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310. The procedure illustrated in FIG.13B comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg 11321 and a Msg 21322. The Msg 11321 and the Msg 21322 may be analogous in some respects to the Msg 11311 and a Msg 21312 illustrated in FIG.13A, respectively. As will be understood from FIGS.13A and 13B, the contention-free random access procedure may not include messages analogous to the Msg 31313 and/or the Msg 4 1314. [0217] The contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG.13B may be initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, SCell addition, and/or handover. For example, a base station may indicate or assign to the UE the preamble to be used for the Msg 11321. The UE may receive, from the base station via PDCCH and/or RRC, an indication of a preamble (e.g., ra-PreambleIndex). [0218] After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra- ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the RAR. In the event of a beam failure recovery request, the base station may configure the UE with a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search space indicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpaceId). The UE may monitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) on the search space. In the contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG.13B, the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes after or in response to transmission of Msg 11321 and reception of a corresponding Msg 21322. The UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to a C-RNTI. The UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if the UE receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifier corresponding to a preamble transmitted by the UE and/or the RAR comprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier. The UE may determine the response as an indication of an acknowledgement for an SI request. [0219] FIG.13C illustrates another two-step random access procedure. Similar to the random access procedures illustrated in FIGS.13A and 13B, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1330 to the UE. The configuration message 1330 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/or the configuration message 1320. The procedure illustrated in FIG.13C comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg A 1331 and a Msg B 1332. [0220] Msg A 1331 may be transmitted in an uplink transmission by the UE. Msg A 1331 may comprise one or more transmissions of a preamble 1341 and/or one or more transmissions of a transport block 1342. The transport block 1342 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 31313 illustrated in FIG.13A. The transport block 1342 may comprise UCI (e.g., an SR, a HARQ ACK/NACK, and/or the like). The UE may receive the Msg B 1332 after or in response to transmitting the Msg A 1331. The Msg B 1332 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 21312 (e.g., an RAR) illustrated in FIGS.13A and 13B and/or the Msg 41314 illustrated in FIG.13A. [0221] The UE may initiate the two-step random access procedure in FIG.13C for licensed spectrum and/or unlicensed spectrum. The UE may determine, based on one or more factors, whether to initiate the two-step random access procedure. The one or more factors may be: a radio access technology in use (e.g., LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the UE has valid TA or not; a cell size; the UE’s RRC state; a type of spectrum (e.g., licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any other suitable factors. [0222] The UE may determine, based on two-step RACH parameters included in the configuration message 1330, a radio resource and/or an uplink transmit power for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342 included in the Msg A 1331. The RACH parameters may indicate a modulation and coding schemes (MCS), a time-frequency resource, and/or a power control for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342. A time- frequency resource for transmission of the preamble 1341 (e.g., a PRACH) and a time- frequency resource for transmission of the transport block 1342 (e.g., a PUSCH) may be multiplexed using FDM, TDM, and/or CDM. The RACH parameters may enable the UE to determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for monitoring for and/or receiving Msg B 1332. [0223] The transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g., delay-sensitive data), an identifier of the UE, security information, and/or device information (e.g., an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)). The base station may transmit the Msg B 1332 as a response to the Msg A 1331. The Msg B 1332 may comprise at least one of following: a preamble identifier; a timing advance command; a power control command; an uplink grant (e.g., a radio resource assignment and/or an MCS); a UE identifier for contention resolution; and/or an RNTI (e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI). The UE may determine that the two-step random access procedure is successfully completed if: a preamble identifier in the Msg B 1332 is matched to a preamble transmitted by the UE; and/or the identifier of the UE in Msg B 1332 is matched to the identifier of the UE in the Msg A 1331 (e.g., the transport block 1342). [0224] A UE and a base station may exchange control signaling. The control signaling may be referred to as L1/L2 control signaling and may originate from the PHY layer (e.g., layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g., layer 2). The control signaling may comprise downlink control signaling transmitted from the base station to the UE and/or uplink control signaling transmitted from the UE to the base station. [0225] The downlink control signaling may comprise: a downlink scheduling assignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplink radio resources and/or a transport format; a slot format information; a preemption indication; a power control command; and/or any other suitable signaling. The UE may receive the downlink control signaling in a payload transmitted by the base station on a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). The payload transmitted on the PDCCH may be referred to as downlink control information (DCI). In some scenarios, the PDCCH may be a group common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of UEs. [0226] A base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC) parity bits to a DCI in order to facilitate detection of transmission errors. When the DCI is intended for a UE (or a group of the UEs), the base station may scramble the CRC parity bits with an identifier of the UE (or an identifier of the group of the UEs). Scrambling the CRC parity bits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or an exclusive OR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits. The identifier may comprise a 16-bit value of a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI). [0227] DCIs may be used for different purposes. A purpose may be indicated by the type of RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits. For example, a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI (P-RNTI) may indicate paging information and/or a system information change notification. The P-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a system information RNTI (SI-RNTI) may indicate a broadcast transmission of the system information. The SI-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI) may indicate a random access response (RAR). A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a cell RNTI (C-RNTI) may indicate a dynamically scheduled unicast transmission and/or a triggering of PDCCH-ordered random access. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a temporary cell RNTI (TC-RNTI) may indicate a contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3 analogous to the Msg 31313 illustrated in FIG.13A). Other RNTIs configured to the UE by a base station may comprise a Configured Scheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUCCH RNTI (TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI (TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI (INT-RNTI), a Slot Format Indication RNTI (SFI- RNTI), a Semi-Persistent CSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), a Modulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI), and/or the like. [0228] Depending on the purpose and/or content of a DCI, the base station may transmit the DCIs with one or more DCI formats. For example, DCI format 0_0 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell. DCI format 0_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 0_1 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 0_0). DCI format 1_0 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell. DCI format 1_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0). DCI format 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to a group of UEs. DCI format 2_1 may be used for notifying a group of UEs of a physical resource block and/or OFDM symbol where the UE may assume no transmission is intended to the UE. DCI format 2_2 may be used for transmission of a transmit power control (TPC) command for PUCCH or PUSCH. DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmission of a group of TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs. DCI format(s) for new functions may be defined in future releases. DCI formats may have different DCI sizes, or may share the same DCI size. [0229] After scrambling a DCI with a RNTI, the base station may process the DCI with channel coding (e.g., polar coding), rate matching, scrambling and/or QPSK modulation. A base station may map the coded and modulated DCI on resource elements used and/or configured for a PDCCH. Based on a payload size of the DCI and/or a coverage of the base station, the base station may transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupying a number of contiguous control channel elements (CCEs). The number of the contiguous CCEs (referred to as aggregation level) may be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and/or any other suitable number. A CCE may comprise a number (e.g., 6) of resource-element groups (REGs). A REG may comprise a resource block in an OFDM symbol. The mapping of the coded and modulated DCI on the resource elements may be based on mapping of CCEs and REGs (e.g., CCE-to-REG mapping). [0230] FIG.14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part. The base station may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH on one or more control resource sets (CORESETs). A CORESET may comprise a time-frequency resource in which the UE tries to decode a DCI using one or more search spaces. The base station may configure a CORESET in the time-frequency domain. In the example of FIG.14A, a first CORESET 1401 and a second CORESET 1402 occur at the first symbol in a slot. The first CORESET 1401 overlaps with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequency domain. A third CORESET 1403 occurs at a third symbol in the slot. A fourth CORESET 1404 occurs at the seventh symbol in the slot. CORESETs may have a different number of resource blocks in frequency domain. [0231] FIG.14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing. The CCE-to-REG mapping may be an interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purpose of providing frequency diversity) or a non-interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purposes of facilitating interference coordination and/or frequency-selective transmission of control channels). The base station may perform different or same CCE-to- REG mapping on different CORESETs. A CORESET may be associated with a CCE-to-REG mapping by RRC configuration. A CORESET may be configured with an antenna port quasi co-location (QCL) parameter. The antenna port QCL parameter may indicate QCL information of a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) for PDCCH reception in the CORESET. [0232] The base station may transmit, to the UE, RRC messages comprising configuration parameters of one or more CORESETs and one or more search space sets. The configuration parameters may indicate an association between a search space set and a CORESET. A search space set may comprise a set of PDCCH candidates formed by CCEs at a given aggregation level. The configuration parameters may indicate: a number of PDCCH candidates to be monitored per aggregation level; a PDCCH monitoring periodicity and a PDCCH monitoring pattern; one or more DCI formats to be monitored by the UE; and/or whether a search space set is a common search space set or a UE-specific search space set. A set of CCEs in the common search space set may be predefined and known to the UE. A set of CCEs in the UE- specific search space set may be configured based on the UE’s identity (e.g., C-RNTI). [0233] As shown in FIG.14B, the UE may determine a time-frequency resource for a CORESET based on RRC messages. The UE may determine a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., interleaved or non-interleaved, and/or mapping parameters) for the CORESET based on configuration parameters of the CORESET. The UE may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of search space sets configured on the CORESET based on the RRC messages. The UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates according to configuration parameters of a search space set. The UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more CORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs. Monitoring may comprise decoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the set of the PDCCH candidates according to the monitored DCI formats. Monitoring may comprise decoding a DCI content of one or more PDCCH candidates with possible (or configured) PDCCH locations, possible (or configured) PDCCH formats (e.g., number of CCEs, number of PDCCH candidates in common search spaces, and/or number of PDCCH candidates in the UE-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats. The decoding may be referred to as blind decoding. The UE may determine a DCI as valid for the UE, in response to CRC checking (e.g., scrambled bits for CRC parity bits of the DCI matching a RNTI value). The UE may process information contained in the DCI (e.g., a scheduling assignment, an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlink preemption, and/or the like). [0234] The UE may transmit uplink control signaling (e.g., uplink control information (UCI)) to a base station. The uplink control signaling may comprise hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) acknowledgements for received DL-SCH transport blocks. The UE may transmit the HARQ acknowledgements after receiving a DL-SCH transport block. Uplink control signaling may comprise channel state information (CSI) indicating channel quality of a physical downlink channel. The UE may transmit the CSI to the base station. The base station, based on the received CSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g., comprising multi-antenna and beamforming schemes) for a downlink transmission. Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests (SR). The UE may transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is available for transmission to the base station. The UE may transmit a UCI (e.g., HARQ acknowledgements (HARQ-ACK), CSI report, SR, and the like) via a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). The UE may transmit the uplink control signaling via a PUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats. [0235] There may be five PUCCH formats and the UE may determine a PUCCH format based on a size of the UCI (e.g., a number of uplink symbols of UCI transmission and a number of UCI bits). PUCCH format 0 may have a length of one or two OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE may transmit UCI in a PUCCH resource using PUCCH format 0 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of HARQ- ACK information bits with positive or negative SR (HARQ-ACK/SR bits) is one or two. PUCCH format 1 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 1 if the transmission is four or more symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK/SR bits is one or two. PUCCH format 2 may occupy one or two OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 2 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of UCI bits is two or more. PUCCH format 3 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 3 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and PUCCH resource does not include an orthogonal cover code. PUCCH format 4 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 4 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and the PUCCH resource includes an orthogonal cover code. [0236] The base station may transmit configuration parameters to the UE for a plurality of PUCCH resource sets using, for example, an RRC message. The plurality of PUCCH resource sets (e.g., up to four sets) may be configured on an uplink BWP of a cell. A PUCCH resource set may be configured with a PUCCH resource set index, a plurality of PUCCH resources with a PUCCH resource being identified by a PUCCH resource identifier (e.g., pucch- Resourceid), and/or a number (e.g. a maximum number) of UCI information bits the UE may transmit using one of the plurality of PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. When configured with a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, the UE may select one of the plurality of PUCCH resource sets based on a total bit length of the UCI information bits (e.g., HARQ- ACK, SR, and/or CSI). If the total bit length of UCI information bits is two or fewer, the UE may select a first PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “0”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than two and less than or equal to a first configured value, the UE may select a second PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “1”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the first configured value and less than or equal to a second configured value, the UE may select a third PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “2”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the second configured value and less than or equal to a third value (e.g., 1406), the UE may select a fourth PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3”. [0237] After determining a PUCCH resource set from a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, the UE may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCH resource set for UCI (HARQ- ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission. The UE may determine the PUCCH resource based on a PUCCH resource indicator in a DCI (e.g., with a DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on a PDCCH. A three-bit PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate one of eight PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. Based on the PUCCH resource indicator, the UE may transmit the UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI and/or SR) using a PUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI. [0238] FIG.15 illustrates an example of a wireless device 1502 in communication with a base station 1504 in accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure. The wireless device 1502 and base station 1504 may be part of a mobile communication network, such as the mobile communication network 100 illustrated in FIG.1A, the mobile communication network 150 illustrated in FIG.1B, or any other communication network. Only one wireless device 1502 and one base station 1504 are illustrated in FIG.15, but it will be understood that a mobile communication network may include more than one UE and/or more than one base station, with the same or similar configuration as those shown in FIG.15. [0239] The base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a core network (not shown) through radio communications over the air interface (or radio interface) 1506. The communication direction from the base station 1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 is known as the downlink, and the communication direction from the wireless device 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface is known as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques. [0240] In the downlink, data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from the base station 1504 may be provided to the processing system 1508 of the base station 1504. The data may be provided to the processing system 1508 by, for example, a core network. In the uplink, data to be sent to the base station 1504 from the wireless device 1502 may be provided to the processing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502. The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 and layer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission. Layer 2 may include an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer, for example, with respect to FIG.2A, FIG.2B, FIG.3, and FIG.4A. Layer 3 may include an RRC layer as with respect to FIG.2B. [0241] After being processed by processing system 1508, the data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1510 of base station 1504. Similarly, after being processed by the processing system 1518, the data to be sent to base station 1504 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1520 of the wireless device 1502. The transmission processing system 1510 and the transmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG.2A, FIG.2B, FIG.3, and FIG.4A. For transmit processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, forward error correction coding of transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping of transport channels to physical channels, modulation of physical channel, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like. [0242] At the base station 1504, a reception processing system 1512 may receive the uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502. At the wireless device 1502, a reception processing system 1522 may receive the downlink transmission from base station 1504. The reception processing system 1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG.2A, FIG.2B, FIG.3, and FIG.4A. For receive processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, error detection, forward error correction decoding, deinterleaving, demapping of transport channels to physical channels, demodulation of physical channels, MIMO or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like. [0243] As shown in FIG.15, a wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 may include multiple antennas. The multiple antennas may be used to perform one or more MIMO or multi-antenna techniques, such as spatial multiplexing (e.g., single-user MIMO or multi-user MIMO), transmit/receive diversity, and/or beamforming. In other examples, the wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 may have a single antenna. [0244] The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 maybe associated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively. Memory 1514 and memory 1524 (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) may store computer program instructions or code that may be executed by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 to carry out one or more of the functionalities discussed in the present application. Although not shown in FIG.15, the transmission processing system 1510, the transmission processing system 1520, the reception processing system 1512, and/or the reception processing system 1522 may be coupled to a memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that may be executed to carry out one or more of their respective functionalities. [0245] The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may comprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors. The one or more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, for example, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least one of signal coding/processing, data processing, power control, input/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enable the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 to operate in a wireless environment. [0246] The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to one or more peripherals 1516 and one or more peripherals 1526, respectively. The one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or more peripherals 1526 may include software and/or hardware that provide features and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, a keypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver, a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, an electronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or more sensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a radar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a camera, and/or the like). The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may receive user input data from and/or provide user output data to the one or more peripherals 1516 and/or the one or more peripherals 1526. The processing system 1518 in the wireless device 1502 may receive power from a power source and/or may be configured to distribute the power to the other components in the wireless device 1502. The power source may comprise one or more sources of power, for example, a battery, a solar cell, a fuel cell, or any combination thereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to a GPS chipset 1517 and a GPS chipset 1527, respectively. The GPS chipset 1517 and the GPS chipset 1527 may be configured to provide geographic location information of the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504, respectively. [0247] FIG.16A illustrates an example structure for uplink transmission. A baseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel may perform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols; precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) or CP-OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like. In an example, when transform precoding is enabled, a SC-FDMA signal for uplink transmission may be generated. In an example, when transform precoding is not enabled, an CP-OFDM signal for uplink transmission may be generated by FIG.16A. These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments. [0248] FIG.16B illustrates an example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be a complex-valued SC- FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission. [0249] FIG.16C illustrates an example structure for downlink transmissions. A baseband signal representing a physical downlink channel may perform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise: scrambling of coded bits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued modulation symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like. These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments. [0250] FIG.16D illustrates another example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be a complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission. [0251] A wireless device may receive from a base station one or more messages (e.g. RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells (e.g. primary cell, secondary cell). The wireless device may communicate with at least one base station (e.g. two or more base stations in dual-connectivity) via the plurality of cells. The one or more messages (e.g. as a part of the configuration parameters) may comprise parameters of physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers for configuring the wireless device. For example, the configuration parameters may comprise parameters for configuring physical and MAC layer channels, bearers, etc. For example, the configuration parameters may comprise parameters indicating values of timers for physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers, and/or communication channels. [0252] A timer may begin running once it is started and continue running until it is stopped or until it expires. A timer may be started if it is not running or restarted if it is running. A timer may be associated with a value (e.g. the timer may be started or restarted from a value or may be started from zero and expire once it reaches the value). The duration of a timer may not be updated until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g., due to BWP switching). A timer may be used to measure a time period/window for a process. When the specification refers to an implementation and procedure related to one or more timers, it will be understood that there are multiple ways to implement the one or more timers. For example, it will be understood that one or more of the multiple ways to implement a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for the procedure. For example, a random access response window timer may be used for measuring a window of time for receiving a random access response. In an example, instead of starting and expiry of a random access response window timer, the time difference between two time stamps may be used. When a timer is restarted, a process for measurement of time window may be restarted. Other example implementations may be provided to restart a measurement of a time window. [0253] FIG.17 illustrates examples of device-to-device (D2D) communication, in which there is a direct communication between wireless devices. In an example, D2D communication may be performed via a sidelink (SL). The wireless devices may exchange sidelink communications via a sidelink interface. The sidelink interface may refer to a PC5 interface, a Proximity-based Service (e.g., Direct) Communication (or control) 5 interface, and/or ProSe (e.g., Direct) Communication (or control) 5 interface. Sidelink differs from uplink (in which a wireless device communicates to a base station) and downlink (in which a base station communicates to a wireless device). A wireless device and a base station may exchange uplink and/or downlink communications via a user plane interface (e.g., a Uu interface). [0254] As shown in the FIG.17, wireless device #1 and wireless device #2 may be in a coverage area of base station #1. For example, both wireless device #1 and wireless device #2 may communicate with the base station #1 via a Uu interface. Wireless device #3 may be in a coverage area of base station #2. Base station #1 and base station #2 may share a network and may jointly provide a network coverage area. Wireless device #4 and wireless device #5 may be outside of the network coverage area. [0255] In-coverage D2D communication may be performed when two wireless devices share a network coverage area. Wireless device #1 and wireless device #2 are both in the coverage area of base station #1. Accordingly, they may perform an in-coverage intra-cell D2D communication, labeled as sidelink A. Wireless device #2 and wireless device #3 are in the coverage areas of different base stations, but share the same network coverage area. Accordingly, they may perform an in-coverage inter-cell D2D communication, labeled as sidelink B. Partial-coverage D2D communications may be performed when one wireless device is within the network coverage area and the other wireless device is outside the network coverage area. Wireless device #3 and wireless device #4 may perform a partial-coverage D2D communication, labeled as sidelink C. Out-of-coverage D2D communications may be performed when both wireless devices are outside of the network coverage area. Wireless device #4 and wireless device #5 may perform an out-of-coverage D2D communication, labeled as sidelink D. [0256] Sidelink communications may be configured using physical channels, for example, a physical sidelink broadcast channel (PSBCH), a physical sidelink feedback channel (PSFCH), a physical sidelink discovery channel (PSDCH), a physica l sidelink control channel (PSCCH), and/or a physical sidelink shared channel (PSSCH). PSBCH may be used by a first wireless device to send broadcast information to a second wireless device. PSBCH may be similar in some respects to PBCH. The broadcast information may comprise, for example, a slot format indication, resource pool information, a sidelink system frame number, or any other suitable broadcast information. PSFCH may be used by a first wireless device to send feedback information to a second wireless device. The feedback information may comprise, for example, HARQ feedback information. PSDCH may be used by a first wireless device to send discovery information to a second wireless device. The discovery information may be used by a wireless device to signal its presence and/or the availability of services to other wireless devices in the area. PSCCH may be used by a first wireless device to send sidelink control information (SCI) to a second wireless device. PSCCH may be similar in some respects to PDCCH and/or PUCCH. The control information may comprise, for example, time/frequency resource allocation information (RB size, a number of retransmissions, etc.), demodulation related information (DMRS, MCS, RV, etc.), identifying information for a transmitting wireless device and/or a receiving wireless device, a process identifier (HARQ, etc.), or any other suitable control information. The PSCCH may be used to allocate, prioritize, and/or reserve sidelink resources for sidelink transmissions. PSSCH may be used by a first wireless device to send and/or relay data and/or network information to a second wireless device. PSSCH may be similar in some respects to PDSCH and/or PUSCH. Each of the sidelink channels may be associated with one or more demodulation reference signals. Sidelink operations may utilize sidelink synchronization signals to establish a timing of sidelink operations. Wireless devices configured for sidelink operations may send sidelink synchronization signals, for example, with the PSBCH. The sidelink synchronization signals may include primary sidelink synchronization signals (PSSS) and secondary sidelink synchronization signals (SSSS). [0257] Sidelink resources may be configured to a wireless device in any suitable manner. A wireless device may be pre-configured for sidelink, for example, pre-configured with sidelink resource information. Additionally or alternatively, a network may broadcast system information relating to a resource pool for sidelink. Additionally or alternatively, a network may configure a particular wireless device with a dedicated sidelink configuration. The configuration may identify sidelink resources to be used for sidelink operation (e.g., configure a sidelink band combination). [0258] The wireless device may operate in different modes, for example, an assisted mode (which may be referred to as mode 1) or an autonomous mode (which may be referred to as mode 2). Mode selection may be based on a coverage status of the wireless device, a radio resource control status of the wireless device, information and/or instructions from the network, and/or any other suitable factors. For example, if the wireless device is idle or inactive, or if the wireless device is outside of network coverage, the wireless device may select to operate in autonomous mode. For example, if the wireless device is in a connected mode (e.g., connected to a base station), the wireless device may select to operate (or be instructed by the base station to operate) in assisted mode. For example, the network (e.g., a base station) may instruct a connected wireless device to operate in a particular mode. [0259] In an assisted mode, the wireless device may request scheduling from the network. For example, the wireless device may send a scheduling request to the network and the network may allocate sidelink resources to the wireless device. Assisted mode may be referred to as network-assisted mode, gNB-assisted mode, or base station-assisted mode. In an autonomous mode, the wireless device may select sidelink resources based on measurements within one or more resource pools (for example, pre-configure or network-assigned resource pools), sidelink resource selections made by other wireless devices, and/or sidelink resource usage of other wireless devices. [0260] To select sidelink resources, a wireless device may observe a sensing window and a selection window. During the sensing window, the wireless device may observe SCI transmitted by other wireless devices using the sidelink resource pool. The SCIs may identify resources that may be used and/or reserved for sidelink transmissions. Based on the resources identified in the SCIs, the wireless device may select resources within the selection window (for example, resource that are different from the resources identified in the SCIs). The wireless device may transmit using the selected sidelink resources. [0261] FIG.18 illustrates an example of a resource pool for sidelink operations. A wireless device may operate using one or more sidelink cells. A sidelink cell may include one or more resource pools. Each resource pool may be configured to operate in accordance with a particular mode (for example, assisted or autonomous). The resource pool may be divided into resource units. In the frequency domain, each resource unit may comprise, for example, one or more resource blocks which may be referred to as a sub-channel. In the time domain, each resource unit may comprise, for example, one or more slots, one or more subframes, and/or one or more OFDM symbols. The resource pool may be continuous or non-continuous in the frequency domain and/or the time domain (for example, comprising contiguous resource units or non-contiguous resource units). The resource pool may be divided into repeating resource pool portions. The resource pool may be shared among one or more wireless devices. Each wireless device may attempt to transmit using different resource units, for example, to avoid collisions. [0262] Sidelink resource pools may be arranged in any suitable manner. In the figure, the example resource pool is non-contiguous in the time domain and confined to a single sidelink BWP. In the example resource pool, frequency resources are divided into a Nf resource units per unit of time, numbered from zero to Nf-1. The example resource pool may comprise a plurality of portions (non-contiguous in this example) that repeat every k units of time. In the figure, time resources are numbered as n, n+1… n+k, n+k+1…, etc. [0263] A wireless device may select for transmission one or more resource units from the resource pool. In the example resource pool, the wireless device selects resource unit (n,0) for sidelink transmission. The wireless device may further select periodic resource units in later portions of the resource pool, for example, resource unit (n+k,0), resource unit (n+2k,0), resource unit (n+3k,0), etc. The selection may be based on, for example, a determination that a transmission using resource unit (n,0) will not (or is not likely) to collide with a sidelink transmission of a wireless device that shares the sidelink resource pool. The determination may be based on, for example, behavior of other wireless devices that share the resource pool. For example, if no sidelink transmissions are detected in resource unit (n-k,0), then the wireless device may select resource unit (n,0), resource (n+k,0), etc. For example, if a sidelink transmission from another wireless device is detected in resource unit (n-k,1), then the wireless device may avoid selection of resource unit (n,1), resource (n+k,1), etc. [0264] Different sidelink physical channels may use different resource pools. For example, PSCCH may use a first resource pool and PSSCH may use a second resource pool. Different resource priorities may be associated with different resource pools. For example, data associated with a first QoS, service, priority, and/or other characteristic may use a first resource pool and data associated with a second QoS, service, priority, and/or other characteristic may use a second resource pool. For example, a network (e.g., a base station) may configure a priority level for each resource pool, a service to be supported for each resource pool, etc. For example, a network (e.g., a base station) may configure a first resource pool for use by unicast UEs, a second resource pool for use by groupcast UEs, etc. For example, a network (e.g., a base station) may configure a first resource pool for transmission of sidelink data, a second resource pool for transmission of discovery messages, etc. [0265] In an example of vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communications via a Uu interface and/or a PC5 interface, the V2X communications may be vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communications. A wireless device in the V2V communications may be a vehicle. In an example, the V2X communications may be vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P) communications. A wireless device in the V2P communications may be a pedestrian equipped with a mobile phone/handset. In an example, the V2X communications may be vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I) communications. The infrastructure in the V2I communications may be a base station/access point/node/road side unit. A wireless device in the V2X communications may be a transmitting wireless device performing one or more sidelink transmissions to a receiving wireless device. The wireless device in the V2X communications may be a receiving wireless device receiving one or more sidelink transmissions from a transmitting wireless device. [0266] FIG.19 illustrates an example of sidelink symbols in a slot. In an example, a sidelink transmission may be transmitted in a slot in the time domain. In an example, a wireless device may have data to transmit via sidelink. The wireless device may segment the data into one or more transport blocks (TBs). The one or more TBs may comprise different pieces of the data. A TB of the one or more TBs may be a data packet of the data. The wireless device may transmit a TB of the one or more TBs (e.g., a data packet) via one or more sidelink transmissions (e.g., via PSCCH/PSSCH in one or more slots). In an example, a sidelink transmission (e.g., in a slot) may comprise SCI. The sidelink transmission may further comprise a TB. The SCI may comprise a 1^st-stage SCI and a 2^nd-stage SCI. A PSCCH of the sidelink transmission may comprise the 1^st-stage SCI for scheduling a PSSCH (e.g., the TB). The PSSCH of the sidelink transmission may comprise the 2^nd-stage SCI. The PSSCH of the sidelink transmission may further comprise the TB. In an example, sidelink symbols in a slot may or may not start from the first symbol of the slot. The sidelink symbols in the slot may or may not end at the last symbol of the slot. In an example of FIG.19, sidelink symbols in a slot start from the second symbol of the slot. In an example of FIG.19, the sidelink symbols in the slot end at the twelfth symbol of the slot. A first sidelink transmission may comprise a first automatic gain control (AGC) symbol (e.g., the second symbol in the slot), a PSCCH (e.g., in the third, fourth and the fifth symbols in a sub-channel in the slot), a PSSCH (e.g., from the third symbol to the eighth symbol in the slot), and/or a first guard symbol (e.g., the ninth symbol in the slot). A second sidelink transmission may comprise a second AGC symbol (e.g., the tenth symbol in the slot), a PSFCH (e.g., the eleventh symbol in the slot), and/or a second guard symbol for the second sidelink transmission (e.g., the twelfth symbol in the slot). In an example, one or more HARQ feedbacks (e.g., positive acknowledgement or ACK and/or negative acknowledgement or NACK) may be transmitted via the PSFCH. In an example, the PSCCH, the PSSCH, and the PSFCH may have different number of sub- channels (e.g., a different number of frequency resources) in the frequency domain. [0267] The 1^st-stage SCI may be a SCI format 1-A. The SCI format 1-A may comprise a plurality of fields used for scheduling of the first TB on the PSSCH and the 2^nd-stage SCI on the PSSCH. The following information may be transmitted by means of the SCI format 1-A. - A priority of the sidelink transmission. For example, the priority may be a physical layer (e.g., layer 1) priority of the sidelink transmission. For example, the priority may be determined based on logical channel priorities of the sidelink transmission; - Frequency resource assignment of the PSSCH; - Time resource assignment of the PSSCH; - Resource reservation period/interval for a second TB; - Demodulation reference signal (DMRS) pattern; - A format of the 2^nd-stage SCI; - Beta_offset indicator; - Number of DMRS port; - Modulation and coding scheme of the PSSCH; - Additional MCS table indicator; - PSFCH overhead indication; - Reserved bits. [0268] The 2^nd-stage SCI may be a SCI format 2-A. The SCI format 2-A may be used for the decoding of the PSSCH, with HARQ operation when HARQ-ACK information includes ACK or NACK, or when there is no feedback of HARQ-ACK information. The SCI format 2-A may comprise a plurality of fields indicating the following information. - HARQ process number; - New data indicator; - Redundancy version; - Source ID of a transmitter (e.g., a transmitting wireless device) of the sidelink transmission; - Destination ID of a receiver (e.g., a receiving wireless device) of the sidelink transmission; - HARQ feedback enabled/disabled indicator; - Cast type indicator indicating that the sidelink transmission is a broadcast, a groupcast and/or a unicast; - CSI request. [0269] The 2^nd-stage SCI may be a SCI format 2-B. The SCI format 2-B may be used for the decoding of the PSSCH, with HARQ operation when HARQ-ACK information includes only NACK, or when there is no feedback of HARQ-ACK information. The SCI format 2-B may comprise a plurality of fields indicating the following information. - HARQ process number; - New data indicator; - Redundancy version; - Source ID of a transmitter (e.g., a transmitting wireless device) of the sidelink transmission; - Destination ID of a receiver (e.g., a receiving wireless device) of the sidelink transmission; - HARQ feedback enabled/disabled indicator; - Zone ID indicating a zone in which a transmitter (e.g., a transmitting wireless device) of the sidelink transmission is geographic located; - Communication range requirement indicating a communication range of the sidelink transmission. [0270] FIG.20 illustrates an example of resource indication for a first TB (e.g, a first data packet) and resource reservation for a second TB (e.g., a second data packet). SCI of an initial transmission (e.g., a first transmission) and/or retransmission of the first TB may comprise one or more first parameters (e.g., Frequency resource assignment and Time resource assignment) indicating one or more first time and frequency (T/F) resources for transmission and/or retransmission of the first TB. The SCI may further comprise one or more second parameters (e.g., Resource reservation period) indicating a reservation period/interval of one or more second T/F resources for initial transmission and/or retransmission of the second TB. [0271] In an example, in response to triggering a resource selection procedure, a wireless device may select one or more first T/F resources for initial transmission and/or retransmission of a first TB. As shown in FIG.20, the wireless device may select three resources for transmitting the first TB. The wireless device may transmit an initial transmission (initial Tx of a first TB in FIG.20) of the first TB via a first resource of the three resources. The wireless device may transmit a first retransmission (1^st re-Tx in FIG.20) of the first TB via a second resource of the three resources. The wireless device may transmit a second retransmission (2^nd re-Tx in FIG.20) of the first TB via a third resource of the three resources. A time duration between a starting time of the initial transmission of the first TB and the second retransmission of the first TB may be smaller than or equal to 32 sidelink slots (e.g., ^ ≤ 32 slots in FIG.20). A first SCI may associate with the initial transmission of the first TB. The first SCI may indicate a first T/F resource indication for the initial transmission of the first TB, the first retransmission of the first TB and the second retransmission of the first TB. The first SCI may further indicate a reservation period/interval of resource reservation for a second TB. A second SCI may associate with the first retransmission of the first TB. The second SCI may indicate a second T/F resource indication for the first retransmission of the first TB and the second retransmission of the first TB. The second SCI may further indicate the reservation period/interval of resource reservation for the second TB. A third SCI may associate with the second retransmission of the first TB. The third SCI may indicate a third T/F resource indication for the second retransmission of the first TB. The third SCI may further indicate the reservation period/interval of resource reservation for the second TB. [0272] FIG.21 and FIG.22 illustrate examples of configuration information for sidelink communication. In an example, a base station may transmit one or more radio resource control (RRC) messages to a wireless device for delivering the configuration information for the sidelink communication. The configuration information may comprise a field of sl-UE- SelectedConfigRP. A parameter sl-ThresPSSCH-RSRP-List in the field may indicate a list of 64 thresholds. In an example, a wireless device may receive first sidelink control information (SCI) indicating a first priority. The wireless device may have second SCI to be transmitted. The second SCI may indicate a second priority. The wireless device may select a threshold from the list based on the first priority in the first SCI and the second priority in the second SCI. Referring to second exclusion in FIG.26, the wireless device may exclude resources from candidate resource set based on the threshold. A parameter sl-MaxNumPerReserve in the field may indicate a maximum number of reserved PSCCH/PSSCH resources indicated in an SCI. A parameter sl-MultiReserveResource in the field may indicate if it is allowed to reserve a sidelink resource for an initial transmission of a TB by an SCI associated with a different TB, based on sensing and resource selection procedure. A parameter sl- ResourceReservePeriodList may indicate a set of possible resource reservation periods/intervals (e.g., SL-ResourceReservedPeriod) allowed in a resource pool. Up to 16 values may be configured per resource pool. A parameter sl-RS-ForSensing may indicate whether DMRS of PSCCH or PSSCH is used for layer 1 (e.g., physical layer) RSRP measurement in sensing operation. A parameter sl-SensingWindow may indicate a start of a sensing window. A parameter sl-SelectionWindowList may indicate an end of a selection window in resource selection procedure for a TB with respect to priority indicated in SCI. V^{alue ^1 may correspond to 1 ∗ 2µ, value ^5 corresponds to 5 ∗ 2µ, and so on, where µ =} 0_{,1,2,3 for subcarrier spacing (SCS) of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz respectively. A parameter} SL-SelectionWindowConfig may indicate a mapping between a sidelink priority (e.g., sl- Priority) and the end of the selection window (e.g., sl-SelectionWindow). [0273] The configuration information may comprise a parameter sl-PreemptionEnable indicating whether sidelink pre-emption is disabled or enabled in a resource pool. For example, a priority level p_preemption may be configured if the sidelink pre-emption is enabled. For example, if the sidelink pre-emption is enabled but the p_preemption is not configured, the sidelink pre-emption may be applicable to all priority levels. [0274] The configuration information may comprise a parameter sl-TxPercentageList indicating a portion of candidate single-slot PSSCH resources over total resources. For example, value p20 may correspond to 20%, and so on. A parameter SL-TxPercentageConfig may indicate a mapping between a sidelink priority (e.g., sl-Priority) and the portion of candidate single-slot PSSCH resources over total resources (e.g., sl-TxPercentage). [0275] FIG.23 illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader for sidelink shared channel (SL-SCH). The MAC subheader for SL-SCH may comprise seven header fields V/R/R/R/R/SCR/DST. The MAC subheader is octet aligned. For example, the V field may be a MAC protocol date units (PDU) format version number field indicating which version of the SL-SCH subheader is used. For example, the SRC field may carry 16 bits of a Source Layer-2 identifier (ID) field set to a first identifier provided by upper layers. For example, the DST field may carry 8 bits of the Destination Layer-2 ID set to a second identifier provided by upper layers. In an example, if the V field is set to "1", the second identifier may be a unicast identifier. In an example, if the V field is set to "2", the second identifier may be a groupcast identifier. In an example, if the V field is set to "3", the second identifier may be a broadcast identifier. For example, the R field may indicate reserved bit. [0276] FIG.24 illustrates an example time of a resource selection procedure. A wireless device may perform the resource selection procedure to select resources for one or more sidelink transmissions. As shown in FIG.24, a sensing window of the resource selection procedure may start at time (^ − ^0) (e.g., parameter sl-SensingWindow). The sensing window may end at time (^ − ^_^^^^,^). New data of the one or more sidelink transmissions may arrive at the wireless device at time (^ − ^_^^^^,^). The time period ^_^^^^,^ may be a processing delay of the wireless device to determine to trigger the resource selection procedure. The wireless device may determine to trigger the resource selection procedure at time ^ to select the resources for the new data arrived at time (^ − ^_^^^^,^). The wireless device may complete the resource selection procedure at time (^ + ^1). The wireless device may determine the parameter ^1 based on a capability of the wireless device. The capability of the wireless device may be a processing delay of a processor of the wireless device. A selection window of the resource selection procedure may start at time (^ + ^1). The selection window may end at time (^ + ^2) indicating the ending of the selection window. The wireless device may determine the parameter ^2 based on a parameter ^2^^^ (e.g., sl- SelectionWindow). In an example, the wireless device may determine the parameter ^2 subject to ^2^^^ ≤ ^2 ≤ ^^^, where the PDB (packet delay budget) may be the maximum allowable delay (e.g., a delay budget) for successfully transmitting the new data via the one or more sidelink transmissions. The wireless device may determine the parameter ^2^^^ to a corresponding value for a priority of the one or more sidelink transmissions (e.g., based on a parameter SL-SelectionWindowConfig indicating a mapping between a sidelink priority sl- Priority and the end of the selection window sl-SelectionWindow). In an example, the wireless device may set the parameter ^2 = ^^^ if the parameter ^2^^^ > ^^^. [0277] FIG.25 illustrates an example timing of a resource selection procedure. A wireless device may perform the resource selection procedure for selecting resources for one or more sidelink transmissions. Referring to FIG.24, a sensing window of initial selection may start at time (^ − ^0). The sensing window of initial selection may end at time (^ − ^_^^^^,^). New d^{ata of the one or more sidelink transmissions may arrive at the wireless device at the time} (_{^ − ^^^^^,^). The time period ^^^^^,^ may be a processing delay for the wireless device to} determine to trigger the initial selection of the resources. The wireless device may determine to trigger the initial selection at time ^ for selecting the resources for the new data arrived at the time (^ − ^_^^^^,^). The wireless device may complete the resource selection procedure at time (^ + ^1). The time (^ + ^_^^^^,^) may be the maximum allowable processing latency for c^{ompleting the resource selection procedure being triggered at the time ^, where 0 < ^1 ≤} ^_{^^^^,^. A selection window of initial selection may start at time (^ + ^1). The selection} window of initial selection may end at time (^ + ^2). The parameter ^2 may be configured, preconfigured, or determined at the wireless device. [0278] The wireless device may determine first resources (e.g., selected resources in FIG. 25) for the one or more sidelink transmissions based on the completion of the resource selection procedure at the time (^ + ^1). The wireless device may select the first resources from candidate resources in the selection window of initial selection based on measurements in the sensing window for initial selection. The wireless device may determine a resource collision between the first resources and other resources reserved by another wireless device. The wireless device may determine to drop the first resources for avoiding interference. The wireless device may trigger a resource reselection procedure (e.g., a second resource selection procedure) at time (^ − ^3) and/or before time (^ − ^3). The time period ^3 may be a processing delay for the wireless device to complete the resource reselection procedure (e.g., a second resource selection procedure). The wireless device may determine second resources (e.g., reselected resource in FIG.25) via the resource reselection procedure (e.g., a second resource selection procedure). The start time of the first resources may be time ^ (e.g., the first resources may be in slot ^). [0279] In an example, at least one of time parameters ^0, ^_^^^^,^, ^_^^^^,^, ^2, and ^^^ may be configured by a base station to the wireless device. In an example, the at least one of the time parameters ^0, ^_^^^^,^, ^_^^^^,^, ^2, and ^^^ may be preconfigured to the wireless device. The at least one of the time parameters ^0, ^_^^^^,^, ^_^^^^,^, ^2, and ^^^ may be stored in a memory of the wireless device. In an example, the memory may be a Subscriber I^{dentity Module (SIM) card. In an example of FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the time ^, ^, ^0, ^1,} ^_{^^^^,^, ^^^^^,^, ^2, ^2^^^, ^3, and ^^^ may be in terms of slots and/or slot index.} [0280] FIG.26 illustrates an example flowchart of a resource selection procedure by a wireless device for transmitting a TB (e.g., a data packet) via sidelink. [0281] FIG.27 illustrates an example diagram of the resource selection procedure among layers of the wireless device. [0282] Referring to FIG.26 and FIG.27, the wireless device may transmit one or more sidelink transmissions (e.g., a first transmission of the TB and one or more retransmissions of the TB) for the transmitting of the TB. Referring to FIG.19, a sidelink transmission of the one or more sidelink transmission may comprise a PSCCH. The sidelink transmission may comprise a PSSCH. The sidelink transmission may comprise a PSFCH. The wireless device may trigger the resource selection procedure for the transmitting of the TB. The resource selection procedure may comprise two actions. The first action of the two actions may be a resource evaluation action. Physical layer (e.g., layer 1) of the wireless device may perform the first action. The physical layer may determine a subset of resources based on the first action and report the subset of resources to higher layer (e.g., RRC layer and/or MAC layer) of the wireless device. The second action of the two actions may be a resource selection action. The higher layer (e.g., RRC layer and/or MAC layer) of the wireless device may perform the second action based on the reported the subset of resources from the physical layer. [0283] In an example, higher layer (e.g., RRC layer and/or MAC layer) of a wireless device may trigger a resource selection procedure for requesting the wireless device to determine a subset of resources. The higher layer may select resources from the subset of resources for P^{SSCH and/or PSCCH transmission. To trigger the resource selection procedure, e.g., in slot} ^_{, the higher layer may provide the following parameters for the PSSCH and/or PSCCH} transmission: - a resource pool, from which the wireless device may determine the subset of resources; - layer 1 priority, ^ ^!_"# (e.g., sl-Priority referring to FIG.21 and FIG.22), of the PSSCH/PSCCH transmission; - remaining packet delay budget (PDB) of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH transmission; - a number of sub-channels, $_%&'(), for the PSSCH and/or PSCCH transmission in a slot; - a resource reservation period/interval, ^_{*%+,_./}, in units of millisecond (^0). [0284] In an example, if the higher layer requests the wireless device to determine a subset of resources from which the higher layer will select the resources for the PSSCH and/or PSCCH transmission for re-evaluation and/or pre-emption, the higher layer may provide a set o^{f resources ( ^, ^, 1, … ) which may be subject to the re-evaluation and a set of resources} …_{) which may be subject to the pre-emption.} [0285] In an example, a base station (e.g., network) may transmit a message comprising one or more parameters to the wireless device for performing the resource selection procedure. The message may be an RRC/SIB message, a MAC CE, and/or a DCI. In an example, a second wireless device may transmit a message comprising one or more parameters to the wireless device for performing the resource selection procedure. The message may be an RRC message, a MAC CE, and/or a SCI. The one or more parameters may indicate following information. - sl-SelectionWindowList (e.g., sl-SelectionWindow referring to FIG.21 and FIG. 22): an internal parameter ^2^^^ (e.g., ^2^^^ referring to FIG.24) may be set to a corresponding value from the parameter sl-SelectionWindowList for a given value of ^ ^!_"# (e.g., based on SL-SelectionWindowConfig referring to FIG.21 and FIG.22). - sl-ThresPSSCH-RSRP-List (e.g., sl-ThresPSSCH-RSRP-List referring to FIG.21 and FIG.22): a parameter may indicate an RSRP threshold for each combination 4^₅, ^₇8, is a value of a priority field in a received SCI format 1-A and ^₉ is a priority of a sidelink transmission (e.g., the PSSCH/PSCCH transmission) of the wireless device; In an example of the resource selection procedure, an invocation of ^₉ may be ^₉ = ^ ^!_"#. - sl-RS-ForSensing (e.g., sl-RS-ForSensing referring to FIG.21 and FIG.22): a parameter may indicate whether DMRS of a PSCCH or a PSSCH is used, by the wireless device, for layer 1 (e.g., physical layer) RSRP measurement in sensing operation. - sl-ResourceReservePeriodList (e.g., sl-ResourceReservePeriodList referring to FIG.21 and FIG.22) - sl-SensingWindow (e.g., sl-SensingWindow referring to FIG.21 and FIG.22): an internal parameter ^_^ may be defined as a number of slots corresponding to t0_SensingWindow ^0. - sl-TxPercentageList (e.g., based on SL-TxPercentageConfig referring to FIG.21 and FIG.22): an internal parameter : (e.g., sl-TxPercentage referring to FIG.21 and FIG.22) for a given ^ ^!_"# (e.g., sl-Priority referring to FIG.21 and FIG.22) may be defined as sl- xPercentage(^ ^!_"#) converted from percentage to ratio. - sl-PreemptionEnable (e.g., p_preemption referring to FIG.21 and FIG.22): an internal parameter ^ ^!_^^; may be set to a higher layer provided parameter sl- PreemptionEnable. [0286] The resource reservation period/interval, ^_{*%+,_./}, if provided, may be converted from units of ^0 to units of logical slots, resulting in ^_* ^′ %_{+,_./} . [0287] Notation:

... ⁾ may denote a set of slots of a sidelink resource pool. [0288] In the resource evaluation action (e.g., the first action in FIG.26), the wireless device may determine a sensing window (e.g., the sensing window shown in FIG.24 and FIG.25 based on sl-SensingWindow) based on the triggering the resource selection procedure. The wireless device may determine a selection window (e.g., the selection window shown in FIG. 24 and FIG.25 based on sl-SelectionWindowList) based on the triggering the resource selection procedure. The wireless device may determine one or more reservation periods/intervals (e.g., parameter sl-ResourceReservePeriodList) for resource reservation. In a^{n example, a candidate single-slot resource for transmission @A,B may be defined as a set of} $_{%&'() contiguous sub-channels with sub-channel C + D in slot <E} ^=> _{where D = 0, ... , $%&'() −} _{1. The wireless device may assume that a set of $%&'() contiguous sub-channels in the} resource pool within a time interval [^ + ^_^, ^ + ^₁] correspond to one candidate single-slot resource (e.g., referring to FIG.24 and FIG.25). A total number of candidate single-slot resources may be denoted by H_IJIKL. In an example, referring to FIG.24 and FIG.25, the sensing window may be defined by a number of slots in a time duration of [^ – ^_^, ^– ^_^ ^{^} ^_^^,^ ). The wireless device may monitor a first subset of the slots, of a sidelink resource pool, within the sensing window. The wireless device may not monitor a second subset of the slots than the first subset of the slots due to half duplex. The wireless device may perform the following actions based on PSCCH decoded and RSRP measured in the first subset of the slots. In an example, an internal parameter ^ℎ(^₅, ^₇) may be set to the corresponding value of RSRP t^{hreshold indicated by the ^-th field in sl-ThresPSSCH-RSRP-List, where ^}

8_. [0289] Referring to FIG.26 and FIG.27, in the resource evaluation action (e.g., the first action in FIG.26), the wireless device may initialize a candidate resource set (e.g., a set Q_R) to be a set of candidate resources. In an example, the candidate resource set may be the union of candidate resources within the selection window. In an example, a candidate resource may be a candidate single-subframe resource. In an example, a candidate resource may be a candidate single-slot resource. In an example, the set Q_R may be initialized to a set of all candidate single-slot resources. [0290] Referring to FIG.26 and FIG.27, in the resource evaluation action (e.g., the first action in FIG.26), the wireless device may perform a first exclusion for excluding second resources from the candidate resource set based on first resources and one or more reservation periods/intervals. In an example, the wireless device may not monitor the first resources within a sensing window. In an example, the one or more reservation periods/intervals may be configured/associated with a resource pool of the second resources. In an example, the wireless device may determine the second resources within a selection window which might be reserved by a transmission transmitted via the first resources based on the one or more reservation periods/intervals. In an example, the wireless device may exclude a candidate single-slot resource @_A,B from the set Q_R based on following conditions: - the wireless device has not monitored slot

in the sensing window. - for any periodicity value allowed by the parameter sl-ResourceReservePeriodList and a hypothetical SCI format 1-A received in the slot

with "Resource reservation period" field set to that periodicity value and indicating all sub-channels of the resource pool in this slot, T!^U^<^!^ T of a second exclusion would be met. [0291] Referring to FIG.26 and FIG.27, in the resource evaluation action (e.g., the first action in FIG.26), the wireless device may perform a second exclusion for excluding third resources from the candidate resource set. In an example, a SCI may indicate a resource reservation of the third resources. The SCI may further indicate a priority value (e.g., indicated by a higher layer parameter sl-Priority). The wireless device may exclude the third resources from the candidate resource set based on a reference signal received power (RSRP) of the third resources being higher than an RSRP threshold (e.g., indicated by a higher layer parameter sl-ThresPSSCH-RSRP-List). The RSRP threshold may be related to the priority value based on a mapping list of RSRP thresholds to priority values configured and/or pre- configured to the wireless device. In an example, a base station may transmit a message to the wireless device for configuring the mapping list. The message may be a radio resource control (RRC) message. In an example, the mapping list may be pre-configured to the wireless device. A memory of the wireless device may store the mapping list. In an example, a priority indicated by the priority value may be a layer 1 priority (e.g., physical layer priority). In an example, a bigger priority value may indicate a higher priority of a sidelink transmission. A smaller priority value may indicate a lower priority of the sidelink transmission. In another example, a bigger priority value may indicate a lower priority of a sidelink transmission. A smaller priority value may indicate a higher priority of the sidelink transmission. In an example, the wireless device may exclude a candidate single-slot resource @_A,B from the set Q_R based on following conditions: a) the wireless device receives an SCI format 1-A in slot <_S ^=>, and "Resource reservation period" field, if present, and "Priority" field in the received SCI format 1-A indicate the values ^_{*%+,_V/} and ^ ^!_W#; b) the RSRP measurement performed, for the received SCI format 1-A, is higher than ^ℎ(^ ^!_W# , ^ ^!_"#); c) the SCI format received in slot <_S ^=>or the same SCI format which, if and only if the "Resource reservation period" field is present in the received SCI format 1-A, is assumed to be received in slot(s) <^=> S_XY×[\b ]_{^__`a} determines the set of resource blocks and slots which o^{verlaps Here, 3}

^{^^hj^_W#} ^{^ converted to units of logical slots, k = l "]mno} [

\_{]^__`a} ^{p ^} _h^qi ^{and ^ − ^ ≤}

_{= ^ if slot ^ belongs to the set 4< =>} _{^ , <^ , ... ,}

_{otherwise slot <} the first slot after slot ^ belonging to the set 4<^=> , <_^ ^=> , ... ,

otherwise k = 1. ^ is to selection window size ^2 converted to units of ^0. [0292] Referring to FIG.26 and FIG.27, in the resource evaluation action (e.g., the first action in FIG.26), the wireless device may determine whether remaining candidate resources in the candidate resource set are sufficient for selecting resources for the one or more sidelink transmissions of the TB based on a condition, after performing the first exclusion and the second exclusion. In an example, the condition may be the total amount of the remaining candidate resources in the candidate resource set being more than : percent (e.g., indicated by a higher layer parameter sl-TxPercentageList) of the candidate resources in the candidate resource set before performing the first exclusion and the second exclusion. If the condition is not met, the wireless device may increase the RSRP threshold used to exclude the third resources with a value u and iteratively re-perform the initialization, first exclusion, and second exclusion until the condition being met. In an example, if the number of remaining candidate single-slot resources in the set Q_R is smaller than : ⋅ H_IJIKL, then ^ℎ(^₅, ^₇) may be increased by 3 dB and the procedure continues with re-performing of the initialization, first exclusion, and second exclusion until the condition being met. In an example, the wireless device may report the set Q_R (e.g., the remaining candidate resources of the candidate resource set) to the higher layer of the wireless device. In an example, the wireless device may report the set Q_R (e.g., the remaining candidate resources of the candidate resource set when the condition is met) to the higher layer of the wireless device, based on that the number of r^{emaining candidate single-slot resources in the set Q} _R ^{being greater than or equal to : ⋅} H_IJIKL. [0293] Referring to FIG.26 and FIG.27, in the resource selection action (e.g., the second action in FIG.26), the wireless device (e.g., the higher layer of the wireless device) may select fourth resources from the remaining candidate resources of the candidate resource set (e.g., the set Q_R reported by the physical layer) for the one or more sidelink transmissions of the TB. In an example, the wireless device may randomly select the fourth resources from the remaining candidate resources of the candidate resource set. ^{[0294] Referring to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, in an example, if a resource 5 from the set} (_{^, ^, 1, … ) is not a member of QR (e.g., the remaining candidate resources of the candidate} resource set when the condition is met), the wireless device may report re-evaluation of the resource to the higher ^{[0295] Referring to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, in an example, if a resource 3} ^{5 from the set} (₃ _{^, 3} _{^, 3} _{1, … ) meets the conditions below, then the wireless device may report pre-emption of} the resource ₅ ³ to the higher layers. - ₅ ³ is not a member of Q_R , and - ₅ ³ meets the conditions for the second exclusion, with ^ℎ⁽^ ^!_W# , ^ ^!_"# ⁾ set to a final threshold for reaching : ⋅ H_IJIKL, and - the associated priority ^ ^!_W# , satisfies one of the following conditions: - sl-PreemptionEnable is provided and is equal to 'enabled' and ^ ^!_"# > ^ ^!_W# - sl-PreemptionEnable is provided and is not equal to 'enabled', and ^ ^!_W# < ^ ^!_^^; and ^ ^!_"# > ^ ^!_W# [0296] In an example, if the resource ₅ is indicated for re-evaluation by the wireless device (e.g., the physical layer of the wireless device), the higher layer of the wireless device may remove the resource ₅ from the set ⁽ _^, _^, ₁, … ⁾. In an example, if the resource ₅′ is indicated for pre-emption by the wireless device (e.g., the physical layer of the wireless d^{evice), the higher layer of the wireless device may remove the resource 5′ from the set} (₃ _{^, 3} _{^, 3} _{1, … ). The higher layer of the wireless device may randomly select new time and} frequency resources from the remaining candidate resources of the candidate resource set (e.g., the set Q_R reported by the physical layer) for the removed resources ₅ and/or ₅′. The higher layer of the wireless device may replace the removed resources ₅ and/or ₅′ by the new t^{ime and frequency resources. For example, the wireless device may remove the resources} 5_{and/or 5′ from the set ( ^, ^, 1, … ) and/or the set ( 3 3 3} _{^, ^, 1, … ) and add the new time and} frequency resources to the set ⁽ _^, _^, ₁, … ⁾ and/or the set ⁽ _^ ³, _^ ³, ₁ ³, … ⁾ based on the removing of the resources ₅ and/or ₅′. [0297] Sidelink pre-emption may happen between a first wireless device and a second wireless device. The first wireless device may select first resources for a first sidelink transmission. The first sidelink transmission may have a first priority. The second wireless device may select second resources for a second sidelink transmission. The second sidelink transmission may have a second priority. The first resources may partially and/or fully overlap with the second resources. The first wireless device may determine a resource collision between the first resources and the second resources based on that the first resources and the second resources being partially and/or fully overlapped. The resource collision may imply fully and/or partially overlapping between the first resources and the second resources in time, frequency, code, power, and/or spatial domain. Referring to an example of FIG.18, the first resources may comprise one or more first sidelink resource units in a sidelink resource pool. The second resources may comprise one or more second sidelink resource units in the sidelink resource pool. A partial resource collision between the first resources and the second resources may indicate that the at least one sidelink resource unit of the one or more first sidelink resource units belongs to the one or more second sidelink resource units. A full resource collision between the first resources and the second resources may indicate that the one or more first sidelink resource units may be the same as or a subset of the one or more second sidelink resource units. In an example, a bigger priority value may indicate a lower priority of a sidelink transmission. A smaller priority value may indicate a higher priority of the sidelink transmission. In an example, the first wireless device may determine the sidelink pre-emption based on the resource collision and the second priority being higher than the first priority. That is, the first wireless device may determine the sidelink pre-emption based on the resource collision and a value of the second priority being smaller than a value of the first priority. In another example, the first wireless device may determine the sidelink pre-emption based on the resource collision, the value of the second priority being smaller than a priority threshold, and the value of the second priority being smaller than the value of the first priority. [0298] Referring to FIG.25, a first wireless device may trigger a first resource selection procedure for selecting first resources (e.g., selected resources after resource selection with collision in FIG.25) for a first sidelink transmission. A second wireless device may transmit an SCI indicating resource reservation of the first resource for a second sidelink transmission. The first wireless device may determine a resource collision on the first resources between the first sidelink transmission and the second sidelink transmission. The first wireless device may trigger a resource re-evaluation (e.g., a resource evaluation action of a second resource selection procedure) at and/or before time (^ − ^3) based on the resource collision. The first wireless device may trigger a resource reselection (e.g., a resource selection action of the second resource selection procedure) for selecting second resources (e.g., reselected resources after resource reselection in FIG.25) based on the resource re-evaluation. The start time of the second resources may be time ^. [0299] A UE may receive one or more messages (e.g., RRC messages and/or SIB messages) comprising configuration parameters of a sidelink BWP. The configuration parameters may comprise a first parameter (e.g., sl-StartSymbol) indicating a sidelink starting symbol. The first parameter may indicate a starting symbol (e.g., symbol#0, symbol#1, symbol#2, symbol#3, symbol#4, symbol#5, symbol#6, symbol#7, etc.) used for sidelink in a slot. For example, the slot may not comprise a SL-SSB (S-SSB). In an example, the UE may be (pre- )configured with one or more values of the sidelink starting symbol per sidelink BWP. The configuration parameters may comprise a second parameter (e.g., sl-LengthSymbols) indicating number of symbols (e.g., 7 symbols, 8 symbols, 9 symbols, 10 symbols, 11 symbols, 12 symbols, 13 symbols, 14 symbols, etc.) used sidelink in a slot. For example, the slot may not comprise a SL-SSB (S-SSB). In an example, the UE may be (pre-)configured with one or more values of the sidelink number of symbols (symbol length) per sidelink BWP. [0300] The configuration parameters of the sidelink BWP may indicate one or more sidelink (communication) resource pools of the sidelink BWP (e.g., via SL-BWP-PoolConfig and/or SL-BWP-PoolConfigCommon). A resource pool may be a sidelink receiving resource pool (e.g., indicated by sl-RxPool) on the configured sidelink BWP. For example, the receiving resource pool may be used for PSFCH transmission/reception, if configured. A resource pool may be a sidelink transmission resource pool (e.g., indicated by sl-TxPool, and/or sl- ResourcePool) on the configured sidelink BWP. For example, the transmission resource pool may comprise resources by which the UE is allowed to tranmsit NR sidelink communication (e.g., in exceptional conditions and/or based on network scheduling) on the configured BWP. For example, the transmission resource pool may be used for PSFCH transmission/reception, if configured. [0301] Configuration parameters of a resource pool may indicate a size of a sub-channel of the resource pool (e.g., via sl-SubchannelSize) in unit of PRB. For example, the sub-channel size may indicate a minimum granularity in frequency domain for sensing and/or for PSSCH resource selection. Configuration parameters of a resource pool may indicate a lowest/starting RB index of a sub-channel with a lowest index in the resource pool with respect to lowest RB index RB index of the sidelink BWP (e.g., via sl-StartRB-Subchannel). Configuration parameters of a resource pool may indicate a number of sub-channels in the corresponding resource pool (e.g., via sl-NumSubchannel). For example, the sub-channels and/or the resource pool may consist of contiguous PRBs. [0302] Configuration parameters of a resource pool may indicate configuration of one or more sidelink channels on/in the resource pool. For example, the configuration parameters may indicate that the resource pool is configured with PSSCH and/or PSCCH and/or PSFCH. [0303] Configuration parameters of PSCCH may indicate a time resource for a PSCCH transmission in a slot. Configuration parameters of PSCCH (e.g., SL-PSCCH-Config) may indicate a number of symbols of PSCCH (e.g., 2 or 3) in the resource pool (e.g., via sl- TimeResourcePSCCH). Configuration parameters of PSCCH (e.g., SL-PSCCH-Config) may indicate a frequency resource for a PSCCH transmission in a corresponding resource pool (e.g., via sl-FreqResourcePSCCH). For example, the configuration parameters may indicate a number of PRBs for PSCCH in a resource pool, which may not be greater than a number of PRBs of a sub-channel of the resource pool (sub-channel size). [0304] Configuration parameters of PSSCH may indicate one or more DMRS time domain patterns (e.g., PSSCH DMRS symbols in a slot) for the PSSCH that may be used in the resource pool. [0305] A resource pool may or may not be configured with PSFCH. Configuration parameters of PSFCH may indicate a period for the PSFCH in unit/number of slots within the resource pool (e.g., via sl-PSFCH-Period). For example, a value 0 of the period may indicate that no resource for PSFCH is configured in the resource pool and/or HARQ feedback for (all) transmissions in the resource pool is disabled. For example, the period may be 1 slot or 2 slots or 4 slots, etc. Configuration parameters of PSFCH may indicate a set of PRBs that are (actually) used for PSFCH transmission and reception (e.g., via sl-PSFCH-RB-Set). For example, a bitmap may indicate the set of PRBs, wherein a leftmost bit of the bitmap may refer to a lowest RB index in the resource pool, and so on. Configuration parameters of PSFCH may indicate a minimum time gap between PSFCH and the associated PSSCH in unit of slots (e.g., via sl-MinTimeGapPSFCH). Configuration parameters of PSFCH may indicate a number of PSFCH resources available for multiplexing HARQ-ACK information in a PSFCH transmission (e.g., via sl-PSFCH-CandidateResourceType). [0306] A UE may be configured by higher layers (e.g., by RRC configuration parameters) with one or more sidelink resource pools. A sidelink resource pool may be for transmission of PSSCH and/or for reception of PSSCH. A sidelink resource pool may be associated with sidelink resource allocation mode 1 and/or sidelink resource allocation mode 2. In the frequency domain, a sidelink resource pool consists of one or more (e.g., sl-NumSubchannel) contiguous sub-channels. A sub-channel consists of one or more (e.g., sl-SubchannelSize) contiguous PRBs. For example, higher layer parameters (e.g., RRC configuration parameters) may indicate a number of sub-channels in a sidelink resource pool (e.g., sl-NumSubchannel) and/or a number of PRBs per sub-channel (e.g., sl-SubchannelSize). [0307] A set of slots that may belong to a sidelink resource pool. The set of slots may be denoted by ^{=> {}

where 0 ≤ <₅ < 10240 × 2 , 0 ≤ ^ < ^_Sqc. The slot index may be relative to slot#0 of the radio frame corresponding to SFN 0 of the serving cell or DFN 0. The set includes all the slots except |_{=_==}} slots in which S-SS/PSBCH block (S- SSB) is configured. The set includes all the slots except |_r^r=> slots in each of which at least one of Y-th, (Y+1)-th, …, (Y+X-1)-th OFDM symbols are not semi-statically configured as UL as per the higher layer parameter (e.g., tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon-r16 of the serving cell if provided and/or sl-TDD-Configuration-r16 if provided and/or sl-TDD-Config- r16 of the received PSBCH if provided). For example, a higher layer (e.g., MAC or RRC) parameter may indicate a value of Y as the sidelink starting symbol of a slot (e.g., sl- StartSymbol). For example, a higher layer (e.g., MAC or RRC) parameter may indicate a value of X as the number of sidelink symbols in a slot (e.g., sl-LengthSymbols). The set includes all the slots except one or more reserved slots. The slots in the set may be arranged in increasing order of slot index. The UE may determine the set of slot assigned to a sidelink resource pool based on a bitmap

associated with the resource pool w^{here $ =>} ^{^5^Sq^ the length of the bitmap is configured by higher layers. A slot <^ (0 ≤ ^ <} ^{10240 ×}

^| _r^r=> ^{− |} _^;h;^j;^ ^{) may belong to the set of slots if ^} _^ ^{b = 1 where} ^_{3 = ^ ^!U $^5^Sq^. The slots in the set are re-indexed such that the subscripts i of the} remaining slots <′₅ ^=> are successive {0, 1, …, ^′_Sqc − 1} where ^′_Sqc is the number of the slots remaining in the set. [0308] The UE may determine the set of resource blocks assigned to a sidelink resource p^{ool, wherein the resource pool consists of |[W} PRBs. The sub-channel m for ^ =} 0_{,1, ⋯ , ^^^Q^^Tℎ^^^^^ − 1 consists of a set of ^h^^^^h5^; contiguous resource blocks with} t^{he physical resource block number ^[W} = ^h^^^^W}h^q^^ + ^ ∙ ^h^^^^h5^; + D for D =}

_{given by higher layer} parameters sl-StartRB-Subchannel and sl-SubchannelSize, respectively. A UE may not be expected to use the last |_[W} mod ^_h^^^^h5^; PRBs in the resource pool. [0309] A UE may be provided/configured with a number of symbols in a resource pool for PSCCH (e.g., by sl-TimeResourcePSCCH). The PSCCH symbols may start from a second symbol that is available for sidelink transmissions in a slot. The UE may be provided/configured with a number of PRBs in the resource pool for PSCCH (e.g., by sl- FreqResourcePSCCH). The PSCCH PRBs may start from the lowest PRB of the lowest sub- channel of the associated PSSCH, e.g., for a PSCCH transmission with a SCI format 1-A. In an example, PSCCH resource/symbols may be configured in every slot of the resource pool. In an example, PSCCH resource/symbols may be configured in a subset of slot of the resource pool (e.g., based on a period comprising two or more slots). [0310] In an example, each PSSCH transmission is associated with an PSCCH transmission. The PSCCH transmission may carry the 1^st stage of the SCI associated with the PSSCH transmission. The 2^nd stage of the associated SCI may be carried within the resource of the PSSCH. In an example, the UE transmits a first SCI (e.g., 1^st stage SCI, SCI format 1-A) on PSCCH according to a PSCCH resource configuration in slot n and PSCCH resource m. For the associated PSSCH transmission in the same slot, the UE may transmit one transport block (TB) with up to two layers (e.g., one layer or two layers). The number of layers (ʋ) may be determined according to the 'Number of DMRS port' field in the SCI. The UE may determine the set of consecutive symbols within the slot for transmission of the PSSCH. The UE may determine the set of contiguous resource blocks for transmission of the PSSCH. Transform precoding may not be supported for PSSCH transmission. For example, wideband precoding may be supported for PSSCH transmission. [0311] The UE may set the contents of the second SCI (e.g., 2^nd stage SCI, SCI format 2-A). The UE may set values of the SCI fields comprising the 'HARQ process number' field, the 'NDI' field, the 'Source ID' field, the 'Destination ID' field, the 'HARQ feedback enabled/disabled indicator' field, the 'Cast type indicator' field, and/or the 'CSI request' field, as indicated by higher (e.g., MAC and/or RRC) layers. The UE may set the contents of the second SCI (e.g., 2^nd stage SCI, SCI format 2-B). The UE may set values of the SCI fields comprising the 'HARQ process number' field, the 'NDI' field, the 'Source ID' field, the 'Destination ID' field, the 'HARQ feedback enabled/disabled indicator' field, the 'Zone ID' field, and/or the 'Communication range requirement' field, as indicated by higher (e.g., MAC and/or RRC) layers. [0312] In an example, one transmission scheme may be defined for the PSSCH and may be used for all PSSCH transmissions. PSSCH transmission may be performed with up to two antenna ports, e.g., with antenna ports 1000-1001. [0313] In sidelink resource allocation mode 1, for PSSCH and/or PSCCH transmission, dynamic grant, configured grant type 1 and/or configured grant type 2 may be supported. The configured grant Type 2 sidelink transmission is semi-persistently scheduled by a SL grant in a valid activation DCI. [0314] The UE may transmit the PSSCH in the same slot as the associated PSCCH. The (minimum) resource allocation unit in the time domain may be a slot. The UE may transmit the PSSCH in consecutive symbols within the slot. The UE may not transmit PSSCH in symbols which are not configured for sidelink. A symbol may be configured for sidelink, according to higher layer parameters indicating the starting sidelink symbol (e.g., startSLsymbols) and a number of consecutive sidelink symbols (e.g., lengthSLsymbols). For example, startSLsymbols is the symbol index of the first symbol of lengthSLsymbols consecutive symbols configured for sidelink. Within the slot, PSSCH resource allocation may start at symbol startSLsymbols+1 (e.g., second sidelink symbol of the slot). The UE may not transmit PSSCH in symbols which are configured for use by PSFCH, if PSFCH is configured in this slot. The UE may not transmit PSSCH in the last symbol configured for sidelink (e.g., last sidelink symbol of the slot). The UE may not transmit PSSCH in the symbol immediately preceding the symbols which are configured for use by PSFCH, if PSFCH is configured in this slot. FIG.19 shows an example of sidelink symbols and the PSSCH resource allocation within the slot. [0315] A Sidelink grant may be received dynamically on the PDCCH, and/or configured semi-persistently by RRC, and/or autonomously selected by the MAC entity of the UE. The MAC entity may have a sidelink grant on an active SL BWP to determine a set of PSCCH duration(s) in which transmission of SCI occurs and a set of PSSCH duration(s) in which transmission of SL-SCH associated with the SCI occurs. A sidelink grant addressed to SLCS- RNTI with NDI = 1 is considered as a dynamic sidelink grant. The UE may be configured with Sidelink resource allocation mode 1. The UE may for each PDCCH occasion and for each grant received for this PDCCH occasion (e.g., for the SL-RNTI or SLCS-RNTI of the UE), use the sidelink grant to determine PSCCH duration(s) and/or PSSCH duraiton(s) for initial tranmsission and/or one or more retranmsission of a MAC PDU for a corresponding sidelink process (e.g., associated with a HARQ buffer and/or a HARQ process ID). [0316] The UE may be configured with Sidelink resource allocation mode 2 to transmit using pool(s) of resources in a carrier, based on sensing or random selection. The MAC entity for each Sidelink process may select to create a selected sidelink grant corresponding to transmissions of multiple MAC PDUs, and SL data may be available in a logical channel. The UE may select a resource pool, e.g., based on a parameter enabling/disabling sidelink HARQ feedback. The UE may perform the TX resource (re-)selection check on the selected pool of resources. The UE may select the time and frequency resources for one transmission opportunity from the resources pool and/or from the resources indicated by the physical layer, according to the amount of selected frequency resources and the remaining PDB of SL data available in the logical channel(s) allowed on the carrier. The UE may use the selected resource to select a set of periodic resources spaced by the resource reservation interval for transmissions of PSCCH and PSSCH corresponding to the number of transmission opportunities of MAC PDUs. The UE may consider the first set of transmission opportunities as the initial transmission opportunities and the other set(s) of transmission opportunities as the retransmission opportunities. The UE may consider the sets of initial transmission opportunities and retransmission opportunities as the selected sidelink grant. The UE may consider the set as the selected sidelink grant. The UE may use the selected sidelink grant to determine the set of PSCCH durations and the set of PSSCH durations. [0317] The UE may for each PSSCH duration and/or for each sidelink grant occurring in this PSSCH duration, select a MCS table allowed in the pool of resource which is associated with the sidelink grant. The UE may determine/set the resource reservation interval to a selected value (e.g., 0 or more). In an example, if the configured sidelink grant has been activated and this PSSCH duration corresponds to the first PSSCH transmission opportunity within this period of the configured sidelink grant, the UE may set the HARQ Process ID to the HARQ Process ID associated with this PSSCH duration and, if available, all subsequent PSSCH duration(s) occuring in this period for the configured sidelink grant. The UE may flush the HARQ buffer of Sidelink process associated with the HARQ Process ID. The UE may deliver the sidelink grant, the selected MCS, and the associated HARQ information to the Sidelink HARQ Entity for this PSSCH duration. [0318] The MAC entity may include at most one Sidelink HARQ entity for transmission on SL-SCH, which maintains a number of parallel Sidelink processes. The (maximum) number of transmitting Sidelink processes associated with the Sidelink HARQ Entity may be a value (e.g., 16). A sidelink process may be configured for transmissions of multiple MAC PDUs. For transmissions of multiple MAC PDUs with Sidelink resource allocation mode 2, the (maximum) number of transmitting Sidelink processes associated with the Sidelink HARQ Entity may be a second value (e.g., 4). A delivered sidelink grant and its associated Sidelink transmission information may be associated with a Sidelink process. Each Sidelink process may support one TB. [0319] For each sidelink grant and for the associated Sidelink process, the Sidelink HARQ Entity may obtain the MAC PDU to transmit from the Multiplexing and assembly entity, if any. The UE may determine Sidelink transmission information of the TB for the source and destination pair of the MAC PDU. The UE may set the Source Layer-1 ID to the 8 LSB of the Source Layer-2 ID of the MAC PDU, and set the Destination Layer-1 ID to the 16 LSB of the Destination Layer-2 ID of the MAC PDU. The UE may set the following information of the TB: cast type indicator, HARQ feedback enabler/disabler, priority, NDI, RV. The UE may deliver the MAC PDU, the sidelink grant and the Sidelink transmission information of the TB to the associated Sidelink process. The MAC entity of the UE may instruct the associated Sidelink process to trigger a new transmission or a retransmission. [0320] In sidelink resource allocation mode 1, for sidelink dynamic grant, the PSSCH transmission may be scheduled by a DCI (e.g., DCI format 3_0). In sidelink resource allocation mode 1, for sidelink configured grant type 2, the configured grant may be activated by a DCI (e.g., DCI format 3_0). In sidelink resource allocation mode 1, for sidelink dynamic grant and sidelink configured grant type 2 the "Time gap" field value m of the DCI may provide an index m + 1 into a slot offset table (e.g., the table may be configured by higher layer parameter sl-DCI-ToSL-Trans). The table value at index m + 1 may be referred to as slot offset ^_=>. The slot of the first sidelink transmission scheduled by the DCI may be the first SL slot of the corresponding resource pool that starts not earlier than ^

^_^ −

+ ^_=> × ^_%LJI, where ^_^^ is the starting time of the downlink slot carrying the corresponding DCI, ^_.^ is the timing advance value corresponding to the TAG of the serving cell on which the DCI is received and ^_=> is the slot offset between the slot of the DCI and the first sidelink transmission scheduled by DCI and ^_%LJI is the SL slot duration. The "Configuration index" field of the DCI, if provided and not reserved, may indicate the index of the sidelink configured type 2. In sidelink resource allocation mode 1, for sidelink configured grant type 1, the slot of the first sidelink transmissions may follow the higher layer configuration. [0321] The resource allocation unit in the frequency domain may be the sub-channel. The sub-channel assignment for sidelink transmission may be determined using the "Frequency resource assignment" field in the associated SCI. The lowest sub-channel for sidelink transmission may be the sub-channel on which the lowest PRB of the associated PSCCH is transmitted. For example, if a PSSCH scheduled by a PSCCH would overlap with resources containing the PSCCH, the resources corresponding to a union of the PSCCH that scheduled the PSSCH and associated PSCCH DM-RS may not be available for the PSSCH. [0322] The redundancy version for transmitting a TB may be given by the "Redundancy version" field in the 2^nd stage SCI (e.g., SCI format 2-A or 2-B). The modulation and coding scheme IMCS may be given by the 'Modulation and coding scheme' field in the 1^st stage SCI (e.g., SCI format 1-A). The UE may determine the MCS table based on the following: a pre- defined table may be used if no additional MCS table is configured by higher layer parameter sl-MCS-Table; otherwise an MCS table is determined based on the 'MCS table indicator' field in the 1^st stage SCI (e.g., SCI format 1-A). The UE may use IMCS and the MCS table determined according to the previous step to determine the modulation order (Q_m) and Target code rate (R) used in the physical sidelink shared channel. [0323] The UE may determine the TB size (TBS) based on the number of REs (NRE) within the slot. The UE may determine the number of REs allocated for PSSCH within a PRB (|_W ³ ^ )

subcarriers in a physical resource block; |_h ^h E^{^} S_^ = sl-LengthSymbols -2, where sl- L^{engthSymbols is the number of sidelink symbols within the slot provided by higher layers;} |_h ^[ E⁼ S^{^} ^^{^} = 3 if 'PSFCH overhead indication' field of SCI format 1-A indicates "1", and |_[= ^^ _{hES^ = 0 otherwise, if higher layer parameter sl-PSFCH-Period is 2 or 4. If higher layer} parameter sl-PSFCH-Period is 0, |_h ^[ E⁼ S^{^} ^^{^} = 0. If higher layer parameter sl-PSFCH-Period is 1, |_h ^[ E⁼ S^{^} ^^{^} = 3. |_^ ^[ ^^W} is the overhead given by higher layer parameter sl-X-Overhead. |_W ^¡ ^^¢W= is given by higher layer parameter sl-PSSCH-DMRS-TimePattern. The UE may determine the total number of REs allocated for PSSCH ^{=^£,1}

− |_W^ , where nPRB is the total number of allocated PRBs for the PSSCH; |_W ⁼ ^^{^£,^} is the total number of REs occupied by the PSCCH and PSCCH DM-RS; |_W ⁼ ^^{^£,1} is the number of coded modulation symbols generated for 2^nd-stage SCI transmission (prior to duplication for the 2^nd layer, if present). The UE may determine the TBS based on the total number of REs allocated for PSSCH (^N _RE ) and/or the modulation order (Qm) and Target code rate (R) used in the physical sidelink shared channel. ^{[0324] For the single codeword ¤ = 0 of a PSSCH, the block of bits ^(Y)(0), … ,}

⁻ 1_{^, where H(Y)} _bit

_{the number of bits in codeword ¤ transmitted on the} physical channel, may be scrambled prior to modulation (e.g., using a scrambling sequence based on a CRC of the PSCCH associated with the PSSCH). For the single codeword ¤ = 0, the block of scrambled bits may be modulated, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols U^(Y)(0⁾,

Layer m^{apping may be done with the number of layers ® ∈ °1,2}, resulting in C(^) =} [_C ^{(^)} _{(^) … C} ^{(±y^)} _(^)]^T, ^ = 0,1, … , H^layer s_ymb − 1. The block of vectors

_{may be pre-coded where the precoding matrix ¶ equals} identity matrix and H^ap =

. For each of the antenna ports used for transmission of PSSCH, the block of complex-valued symbols ¸^{(^)(}0⁾, … , ¸^{(^)}(H^a s_y ^p m_b − 1) may be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor ¹_D ^P M^SS R^C S^H in order to conform to the transmit power and mapped to resource elements (^′, ^)_^,{ in the virtual resource blocks assigned for transmission, where ^³ = 0 is the first subcarrier in the lowest-numbered virtual resource block assigned for transmission. The mapping operation may be done in two steps: first, the complex-valued symbols corresponding to the bit for the 2^nd-stage SCI in increasing order of first the index ^′ over the assigned virtual resource blocks and then the index ^, starting from the first PSSCH symbol carrying an associated DM-RS, wherein the corresponding resource elements in the corresponding physical resource blocks are not used for transmission of the associated DM-RS, PT-RS, or PSCCH; secondly, the complex-valued modulation symbols not corresponding to the 2^nd -stage SCI shall be in increasing order of first the index ^′ over the assigned virtual resource blocks, and then the index ^ with the starting position, wherein the resource elements are not used for 2^nd-stage SCI in the first step; and/or the corresponding resource elements in the corresponding physical resource blocks are not used for transmission of the associated DM-RS, PT-RS, CSI-RS, or PSCCH. [0325] The resource elements used for the PSSCH in the first OFDM symbol in the mapping operation above, including DM-RS, PT-RS, and/or CSI-RS occurring in the first OFDM symbol, may be duplicated in the OFDM symbol immediately preceding the first OFDM symbol in the mapping (e.g., for AGC training purposes). [0326] Virtual resource blocks may be mapped to physical resource blocks according to non- interleaved mapping. For non-interleaved VRB-to-PRB mapping, virtual resource block ^ is mapped to physical resource block ^. [0327] For a PSCCH, the block of bits ^⁽0⁾, … , ^(H_bit − 1), where H_bit is the number of bits transmitted on the physical channel, may be scrambled prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits ^^¿(0), … , ^^¿(H_bit − 1) according to ^^¿(^) = (^(^) + T(^)) mod 2. The block of scrambled bits ^^¿(0), … , ^^¿(H_bit − 1) may be modulated using QPSK, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols U⁽0⁾, … , U(H_symb − 1) where H_symb = H_bit ^⁄ 2. The set of complex-valued modulation symbols U(0), … , U(H_symb − 1) may be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor ¹_D ^P M^SC R^C S^H in order to conform to the transmit power and mapped in sequence starting with U(0) to resource elements (^, ^)_^,{ assigned for transmission, and not used for the demodulation reference signals associated with PSCCH, in increasing order of first the index ^ over the assigned physical resources, and then the index ^ on antenna port p (e.g., ^ = 2000). [0328] The resource elements used for the PSCCH in the first OFDM symbol in the mapping operation above, including DM-RS, PT-RS, and/or CSI-RS occurring in the first OFDM symbol, may be duplicated in the immediately preceding OFDM symbol (e.g., for AGC training purposes). [0329] For sidelink resource allocation mode 1, a UE upon detection of a first SCI (e.g., SCI format 1-A) on PSCCH may decode PSSCH according to the detected second SCI (e.g., SCI formats 2-A and/or 2-B), and associated PSSCH resource configuration configured by higher layers. The UE may not be required to decode more than one PSCCH at each PSCCH resource candidate. For sidelink resource allocation mode 2, a UE upon detection of a first SCI (e.g., SCI format 1-A) on PSCCH may decode PSSCH according to the detected second SCI (e.g., SCI formats 2-A and/or 2-B), and associated PSSCH resource configuration configured by higher layers. The UE may not be required to decode more than one PSCCH at each PSCCH resource candidate. A UE may be required to decode neither the corresponding second SCI (e.g., SCI formats 2-A and/or 2-B) nor the PSSCH associated with a first SCI (e.g., SCI format 1-A) if the first SCI indicates an MCS table that the UE does not support. [0330] Throughout this disclosure, a (sub)set of symbols of a slot, associated with a resource pool of a sidelink BWP, that is (pre-)configured for sidelink communication (e.g., transmission and/or reception) may be referred to as ‘sidelink symbols’ of the slot. The sidelink symbols may be contiguous/consecutive symbols of a slot. The sidelink symbols may start from a sidelink starting symbol (e.g., indicated by an RRC parameter), e.g., sidelink starting symbol may be symbol#0 or symbol#1, and so on. The sidelink symbols may comprise one or more symbols of the slot, wherein a parameter (e.g., indicated by RRC) may indicate the number of sidelink symbols of the slot. The sidelink symbols may comprise one or more guard symbols, e.g., to provide a time gap for the UE to switch from a transmission mode to a reception mode. For example, the OFDM symbol immediately following the last symbol used for PSSCH, PSFCH, and/or S-SSB may serve as a guard symbol. As shown in FIG.19, the sidelink symbols may comprise one or more PSCCH resources/occasions and/or one or more PSCCH resources and/or zero or more PSFCH resources/occasions. The sidelink symbols may comprise one or more AGC symbols. [0331] An AGC symbol may comprise duplication of (content of) the resource elements of the immediately succeeding/following symbol (e.g., a TB and/or SCI may be mapped to the immediately succeeding symbol). In an example, the AGC symbol may be a dummy OFDM symbol. In an example, the AGC symbol may comprise a reference signal. For example, the first OFDM symbol of a PSSCH and its associated PSCCH may be duplicated (e.g., in the AGC symbol that is immediately before the first OFDM symbol of the PSSCH). For example, the first OFDM symbol of a PSFCH may be duplicated (e.g., for AGC training purposes). [0332] In a sidelink slot structure configuration, the first symbol is used for automatic gain c ontrol (AGC) and the last symbol is used for a gap. During an AGC symbol, a receiving and/or sensing UE may perform AGC training. For AGC training, a UE detects the energy/power of a signal in the channel during the AGC symbol and applies a hardware gain to maximize the signal amplitude to the dynamic range of the analog to digital convertor (ADC) at the receiver. The receiver may determine a gain for a received signal, and an AGC duration allows time for the receiver to determine the gain and apply the gain (e.g., hardware gain component) such that when the receiver receives the data (e.g., in the next symbol(s)), the gain of the amplifier has already been adjusted. [0333] In the example embodiment of the present disclosure, for sidelink communication, the transmitter UE may not map data/control information to the AGC symbol. The AGC symbol may not be used for communication and sending information other than energy. The AGC symbol may be a last symbol prior to an earliest symbol of a transmission, such that a gap between AGC symbol and signal/channel transmission is minimized and an accurate gain is determined for receiving the following signal/channel. For example, the AGC symbol, as shown in FIG.19, maybe a symbol immediately preceding the first/earliest symbol of a resource used for a transmission via a channel (e.g., PSCCH and/or PSSCH and/or PSFCH transmission). [0334] In an example, the AGC symbol may comprise duplication of resource elements of the next (immediately following) OFDM symbol. In an example, the AGC symbol may comprise any signal, e.g., a pre-defined signal/sequence and/or dummy information. The purpose of the AGC symbol is to allow the receiver UE to perform AGC training and adjust the hardware gain for a most efficient reception of the following signal. [0335] Throughout this disclosure, the “AGC symbol” may be referred to as “duplicated symbol” and/or “duplication” and/or “the symbol used for duplication” and/or “the immediately preceding symbol comprising the duplication of a first symbol”. [0336] FIG.28 illustrates an example of a sidelink CSI-RS transmission and a sidelink CSI reporting as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. A first wireless device (transmitter UE) may transmit a message (e.g., a sidelink RRC message, e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink) to a second wireless device (receiver UE). The message may comprise SL CSI RS configuration parameters. The message and/or the SL CSI RS configuration parameters may indicate (e.g., configuring or reconfiguring) one or more parameters on sidelink measurement and reporting, indicate (e.g., configuring or reconfiguring) sidelink CSI reference signal resources, and/or to indicate (e.g., configuring or reconfiguring) a CSI reporting latency bound. [0337] Referring to FIG.28, the first wireless device (transmitter UE) may initiate (trigger, perform, run, and/or apply) a sidelink RRC (re-)configuration procedure with a second wireless device (receiver UE). The first wireless device may transmit the message to a second wireless device (receiver UE), e.g., in response to or after initiating the sidelink RRC (re- )configuration procedure. For example, the sidelink RRC (re-)configuration procedure may be for a particular wireless device (e.g., second wireless device in FIG.28), a particular PC5- RRC connection and/or PC5 link (e.g., established between the first the wireless device and the second wireless device). [0338] Referring to FIG.28, the SL CSI RS configuration parameters may comprise sl- LatencyBoundCSI-Report (e.g., sidelink latency bound in FIG.28). sl-LatencyBoundCSI- Report may indicate the SL CSI reporting latency bound. The SL CSI RS configuration parameters included in the message may comprise, for SL CSI-RS transmission (and/or reception), a time resource allocation and/or time resource offset (e.g., sl-CSI-RS- FirstSymbol) indicating a first OFDM symbol in a PRB used for (e.g., a first OFDM symbol in a PRB that carries, if/when sidelink CSI reporting is triggered) SL CSI-RS; and/or a frequency resource allocation and/or frequency resource offset (e.g., sl-CSI-RS- FreqAllocation) indicating the number of antenna ports and the frequency domain allocation for (e.g., indicating frequency radio resource(s) that carries, if/when CSI reporting is triggered) SL CSI-RS. The time resource offset of the time resource offset indicates the time resource allocation) may start from a reference symbol in a slot where the wireless device receives SCI indicating a SL CSI-RS report. For example, the reference symbol may be a first symbol of the slot, a first symbol of PSCCH transmission in the slot, and/or a first symbol of PSSCH transmission in the slot. The frequency resource offset of the frequency resource allocation may start from a reference PRB (or RB or subchannel) in a slot where the wireless device receives the SCI indicating the SL CSI-RS report. For example, the reference PRB (or RB) may be a lowest PRB (or RB) of (e.g., carrying) the PSSCH transmission in a frequency domain. For example, the reference subchannel may be a lowest subchannel of (e.g., carrying) the PSSCH transmission in a frequency domain. For example, the reference PRB (or RB) may be a lowest PRB (or RB) of a lowest subchannel of (e.g., carrying) the PSSCH transmission in a frequency domain. [0339] Referring to FIG.28, the first wireless device may transmit one or more SL reference signals (e.g., SL CSI-RS in FIG.28) in a SL transmission via a SL slot. For example, the SL transmission further comprises at least one of: a first sidelink transmission via the slot and a second sidelink transmission via the slot. The first sidelink transmission may be a PSCCH transmission (e.g., PSCCH) that comprises a first SCI (e.g., first stage SCI as shown in Fig. 19). The second sidelink transmission may be a PSSCH transmission (e.g., PSSCH) that comprises a second SCI (e.g., second stage SCI as shown in Fig.19) and/or SL-SCH data (e.g., comprising MAC PDU, MAC SDU(s) and/or MAC CE(s)) (e.g., as shown in Fig.19). The SL transmission may comprise a SCI triggering the SL CSI report. For example, the SCI is at least one of the first SCI and/or the second SCI. For example, the SCI comprises a field (e.g., 'CSI request' field) with a value (e.g., and/or an indicator) triggering (e.g., indicating a trigger of) a transmission of SL CSI-RS(s) and/or a transmission of SL CSI report indicating measurement result(s) of the SL CSI-RS(s). The SL transmission (e.g., at least one of the first sidelink transmission or the first sidelink transmission) may be at least one of a unicast transmission, a groupcast transmission or a broadcast transmission. [0340] Referring to FIG.28, for example, at least one of the first SCI (e.g., first stage SCI as shown in Fig.19) and/or the second SCI (e.g., second stage SCI as shown in Fig.19) may comprise a destination identifier. The destination identifier may be associated with a unicast PC5 link (e.g., ProSe and/or V2X application layer(s)/server(s) send the destination identifier to the first wireless device). The second wireless device may receive the sidelink transmission. The second wireless device may determine that the destination identifier in the sidelink transmission matches a destination identifier of the second wireless device. The second wireless device may determine that the value of the field in the SCI indicates a trigger of (e.g., triggering) a transmission of the sidelink CSI report from the second wireless device to the first wireless device, e.g., if the destination identifier in the sidelink transmission matches a destination identifier of the second wireless device. The second wireless device may determine to measure the SL CSI-RS(s) and/or transmit (e.g., may transmit) the sidelink CSI report (comprising measurement result(s) of the SL CSI(s)) to the first wireless device, e.g., if the destination identifier in the sidelink transmission matches a destination identifier of the second wireless device, and/or if the value of the field in the SCI indicates a trigger of (e.g., triggering) the sidelink CSI report. [0341] In an example, referring to FIG.28, the second wireless device may start a timer or a window (e.g., sl-CSI-ReportTimer), e.g., if (e.g., in response to and/or after) the second wireless device receives the SCI comprising the field with the value and/or determines to transmit (e.g., transmits) the sidelink CSI report. The first wireless device may start a second timer or a second window (e.g., sl-CSI-ReportTimer), e.g., if (e.g., in response to and/or after) the first wireless device transmits the SL CSI RS(s) and/or the SCI indicating the trigger of the SL CSI report. The second wireless device may transmit the sidelink CSI report before the timer (and/or the second timer) expires and/or while the timer (and/or the second timer) is running. The SL latency bound in FIG.28 may be a value for the timer. For example, the timer may run during a time duration indicated by the SL latency bound. [0342] Referring to FIG.28, the second wireless device may transmit, to the first wireless device, the sidelink CSI report via a sidelink resource. The second wireless device may receive a grant indicating the sidelink resource from a base station, e.g., if the second wireless device is configured with a resource allocation mode 1. The second wireless device may select the sidelink resource (e.g., without communicating with a base station), e.g., if the second wireless device is configured with a resource allocation mode 2. [0343] For example, the second wireless device (e.g., configured with a resource allocation mode 1) receives, from a base station, a grant (e.g., SL grant (e.g., DCI 3_0) in FIG.28) indicating a sidelink resource that is used for transmission of the SL CSI report to the first wireless device and/or that is located (e.g., occurs) within the SL latency bound that starts from a starting time of the timers. The second wireless device may receive, from a base station, the grant in response to or after transmitting a scheduling request to the base station. For example, the second wireless device may transmit, to the base station, a scheduling request to receive the grant (e.g., SL grant in FIG.28), e.g., if the second wireless device does not have an SL grant to transmit the SL CSI report. The base station may transmit the grant (e.g., SL grant in FIG.28) to the second wireless device, e.g., in response to and/or after receiving the scheduling request from the second wireless device. [0344] For example, the second wireless device, e.g., configured with a resource allocation mode 2, selects the sidelink resource, e.g., according to the example embodiments in the present disclosure (e.g., FIG.26). The sidelink resource may be for transmission of the SL CSI report to the first wireless device and/or that is located within the SL latency bound that starts from a starting time of the timers. [0345] Referring to FIG.28, the second wireless device may transmit to the first wireless device, the sidelink CSI report via the sidelink resource (indicated by the SL grant in FIG.28 or selected by the second wireless device configured with resource allocation mode 2), e.g., before the timer expires, while the timer is running, and/or within the latency bound that starts from a starting time of the timer. For example, if the timer runs for the time duration indicated by the latency bound, the second wireless device may determine that the timer expires. The second wireless device may cancel the triggered sidelink CSI report (e.g., may cancel a transmission of the sidelink CSI report), e.g., if (e.g., the second wireless device determines that) the timer expires and/or if the second wireless device does not transmitting the sidelink CSI report before/until the timer expires, while the timer is running, and/or within the latency bound that starts from a starting time of the timer. [0346] In an example, one or more conditions for the first wireless device to transmit the sidelink CSI-RS(s) may comprise that 1) sidelink CSI reporting is enabled by a higher layer parameter (e.g., sl-CSI-Acquisition); and/or 2) a field (e.g., the 'CSI request' field) in a corresponding SCI (e.g., SCI format 2-A) is set to 1. The corresponding SCI may schedule the PSSCH (e.g., be used for decoding of the PSSCH), e.g., with which the first wireless device multiplexes the sidelink CSI-RS(s). The first wireless device may set a value of the 'CSI request' field as indicated by higher layers (e.g., to 1). When the first wireless device is configured with Qp={1,2} sidelink CSI-RS port(s) in sidelink and/or the number of scheduled layers is the first wireless device may determine that the sidelink CSI-RS . For example, ¹_^ ^Ä Ã^ÁÁ V⁽ Á⁾ is the scaling

for the corresponding PSSCH, e.g., with which the first wireless device multiplexes the sidelink CSI-RS(s). [0347] A SL CSI report may comprise SL CSI. The SL CSI may comprise information and/or one or more measurement quantities indicating a channel state that the second wireless device may determine and/or measure from the sidelink CSI-RS received from the first wireless device. For example, the information and/or the one or more measurement quantities may comprise CQI, RI, LI, CRI, PMI, L1-RSRP, L1-SINR, and/or any combination thereof. The second wireless device may determine, by measuring and/or receiving the SL CSI-RS(s), the information and/or the one or more measurement quantities comprising at least one of CQI, RI, LI, CRI, PMI, L1-RSRP, L1-SINR. The second wireless device may transmit, to the first wireless device, the SL CSI via a SL CSI report. The CQI and RI may be reported together. A procedure of transmitting the SL CSI report (and generating the sidelink CSI) may be denoted as SL CSI reporting. The CSI reporting may be aperiodic, semi-persistent, or periodic. Configured SL CSI-RS(s) may be aperiodic, semi-persistent, or periodic. [0348] In the present embodiments, a SL CSI-RS may be interchangeable with and/or referred to as a CSI-RS, e.g., if the CSI-RS is transmitted via/as a sidelink transmission. In the present embodiments, a SL CSI report (or reporting) may be interchangeable with and/or referred to as a CSI-RS report (or reporting), e.g., if the CSI in the CSI-RS report comprise information and/or one or more measurement quantities indicating a channel state that a wireless device may determine and/or measure from the SL CSI-RS received from another wireless device. [0349] In an example, referring to FIG.28, the CSI report triggered by the SCI may be aperiodic CSI report. The SCI (e.g., SCI format 2-A) may comprise 'CSI request' field with a value set to 1 that indicates a trigger of (e.g., aperiodic) CSI report. The first wireless device (e.g., A CSI-triggering wireless device or a wireless device transmitting CSI-RS) may be not allowed to trigger (e.g., aperiodic) CSI report for the same wireless device (e.g., second wireless device) before/until a slot or a symbol in which the SL CSI report timer expires or before/until receiving the CSI report triggered by the SCI (e.g., SCI format 2-A) with the 'CSI request' field set to 1. The second wireless device may not be expected to transmit a sidelink CSI-RS and a sidelink PT-RS which overlap. [0350] In FIG.28, the second wireless device may receive a message (e.g., RRC message and/or RRCReconfigurationSidelink) comprising SL CSI RS configuration parameters. The message may comprise SL-CSI-RS-Config. The SL-CSI-RS-Config may comprise SL CSI RS configuration parameters, e.g., sl-CSI-RS- FreqAllocation, sl-CSI-RS-FirstSymbol, that indicate a resource allocation of SL CSI-RS in a frequency domain and a time domain. [0351] In an example, each of signalings illustrated in FIG.28 may be an optional. For example, receiving, by the second wireless device, the sidelink SL CSI RS configuration parameters from the first wireless device is optional. The second wireless device may receive, from a base station, the sidelink SL CSI RS configuration parameters. For example, transmitting, by the second wireless device, the SL CSI report after or in response to receiving the SL CSI-RS(s) may be optional. The second wireless device may not transmit, to the first wireless device, e.g., after or in response to receiving the SL CSI-RS(s). For example, the SL CSI RS configuration parameters and/or the SCI received with the SL CSI-RS(s) in the same slot may indicate no SL CSI report triggered for the SL CSI-RS(s). For example, if the SL CSI-RS(s) is transmitted for the transmitting or receiving beam refinement of the second wireless device, the second wireless device may not transmit the SL CSI report, and/or the SL CSI RS configuration parameters and/or the SCI received with the SL CSI-RS(s) in the same slot may indicate no SL CSI report triggered for the SL CSI-RS(s). For example, the scheduling request that the second wireless device transmits to the base station is optional. The second wireless device may not transmit to the base station the scheduling request if the second wireless device selects or is configured with a resource allocation mode 2. The second wireless device may not transmit to the base station the scheduling request if the second wireless device has an SL grant (already received from the base station) that accommodates the SL CSI report. [0352] FIG.29 illustrates an example of resource allocation of SL CSI RS as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. The SL CSI RS configuration parameters that the first wireless device transmits and/or that the second wireless device receives in FIG. 28 may indicate a starting frequency and a starting time of the SL CSI-RS in a slot where the first wireless device transmits a SCI triggering a SL CSI report. For example, the SL CSI RS configuration parameters may indicate how many symbols and/or how many REs, and/or how many PRB carrying the SL CSI RS. [0353] The second wireless device may determine (e.g., assume) non-zero transmission power for SL CSI-RS. A SL CSI-RS and the PSCCH (that is located in the same slot and/or that schedules PSSCH carrying the SL CSI-RS) may not be mapped to the same resource element. The SL CSI-RS and PSSCH DM-RS may not be scheduled, mapped, allocated in a same symbol. The SL CSI-RS and SCI (1^st-stage CSI and/or 2nd-stage SCI) may not be scheduled, mapped, allocated in a same symbol. The first wireless device may transmit the SL CSI-RS in resource block(s) used for transmitting the PSSCH, e.g., that carries the SCI format 2-A scheduling the PSSCH, triggering a SL CSI report comprising SL CSI measured based on the SL CSI-RS. The second wireless device may receive, e.g., from the first wireless device, at least one SL latency bound, sl-LatencyBoundCSI-Report, configured for different SL CSI- RS transmissions. [0354] In an example, the SL CSI reporting (e.g., SL CSI reporting procedure) may be used to provide a peer wireless device (the first wireless device) with sidelink CSI. For example, the SL latency bound, sl-LatencyBoundCSI-Report, may be defined, configured, and/or received per (e.g., for) each PC5-RRC connection. For example, the second wireless device may receive a first SL latency bound from a first wireless device for a first PC5-RRC connection and/or first a PC5 link established with the first wireless device. For example, the second wireless device may receive a second SL latency bound from a third wireless device for a second PC5-RRC connection and/or second a PC5 link established with the third wireless device. [0355] In an example, an MAC entity (of the first wireless device and/or the second wireless device) may maintain a timer (e.g., sl-CSI-ReportTimer, SL CSI report timer in FIG.28) for each pair of the Source Layer-2 ID and the Destination Layer-2 ID corresponding to a PC5- RRC connection. The sl-CSI-ReportTimer may be used for an SL-CSI reporting wireless device (e.g., the second wireless device) to follow the latency requirement (e.g., sl- LatencyBoundCSI-Report) signalled from a CSI-report-triggering wireless device (e.g., the first wireless device). The value (e.g., an initial value) of sl-CSI-ReportTimer may be the same as the latency requirement of the SL-CSI reporting in the sl-LatencyBoundCSI-Report configured by RRC. The value indicates a (e.g., maximum) running time of the sl-CSI- ReportTimer. If the sl-CSI-ReportTimer runs for a duration indicated by the value, the wireless device may determine that the sl-CSI-ReportTimer expires. The wireless device may stop the sl-CSI-ReportTimer if the wireless device receives a CSI report. The MAC entity may for each pair of the Source Layer-2 ID and the Destination Layer-2 ID corresponding to the PC5-RRC connection which has been established by upper layers: 1> if the SL-CSI reporting has been triggered by an SCI and not cancelled: 2> if the sl-CSI-ReportTimer for the triggered SL-CSI reporting is not running: 3> start the sl-CSI-ReportTimer. (e.g., t0 in FIG.32) 2> if the sl-CSI-ReportTimer for the triggered SL-CSI reporting expires: 3> cancel the triggered SL-CSI reporting. (e.g., t₂ in FIG.32) 2> else if the MAC entity has SL resources allocated for new transmission and the SL- SCH resources can accommodate the SL-CSI reporting MAC CE and its subheader as a result of logical channel prioritization: 3> instruct the Multiplexing and Assembly procedure to generate a Sidelink CSI Reporting MAC CE; 3> stop the sl-CSI-ReportTimer for the triggered SL-CSI reporting; (e.g., t₁ in FIG.32) 3> cancel the triggered SL-CSI reporting. 2> else if the MAC entity has been configured with Sidelink resource allocation mode 1: 3> trigger a Scheduling Request. [0356] The wireless device may determine that a SL CSI report is pending (e.g., until canceling the SL CSI report), e.g., if the wireless device triggers the SL CSI report. The MAC entity configured with Sidelink resource allocation mode 1 may trigger a Scheduling Request (e.g., FIG.28) if transmission of a pending SL-CSI reporting with the sidelink grant(s) cannot fulfil the latency requirement associated to the SL-CSI reporting. [0357] FIG.30 illustrates an example of SL CSI report as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. For example, the SL CSI report may comprise a MAC CE that includes SL CSI. For example, the MAC CE may be a Sidelink CSI Reporting MAC CE is identified by a MAC subheader with LCID (logical channel ID) predefined. A priority of the Sidelink CSI Reporting MAC CE is fixed to a predefined value (e.g., ‘1’ indicating a highest priority). The Sidelink CSI Reporting MAC CE may comprise at least one of CQI, RI, LI, CRI, PMI, L1-RSRP, or L1-SINR. For example, FIG.30 is an example format of the Sidelink CSI Reporting MAC CE that comprises at least RI and CQI. In FIG.30, the RI may be a field indicating a derived value of the Rank Indicator for sidelink CSI reporting from the measurement results of the SL CSI-RS. The length of the RI field may be predefined (e.g., 1 bit). In FIG.30, the CQI may be a field indicating a derived value of the Channel Quality Indicator for sidelink CSI reporting from the measurement results of the SL CSI-RS. The length of the CQI field may be predefined (e.g., 4 bits). In FIG.30, the R may indicate one or more reserved bits, e.g., that are set to a predefined value (e.g., 0). [0358] In an example, the sidelink transmission may be beam-centric. For example, between peer wireless devices, a transmission of PSCCH, PSSCH, and/or PSFCH may be performed via, through, and/or using a particular beam. A sidelink reference signal (e.g., SL SSB, SL DM-RS, and/or SL CSI-RS) may represent a particular beam for the sidelink transmission. [0359] In sidelink, a wireless device may perform a beam sweeping for the beam-centric sidelink transmission. For example, a first wireless device may transmit, as the beam sweeping, a plurality of sidelink reference signal (SL RSs) (e.g., SL CSI-RSs) to a second wireless device. Each of the plurality of SL RSs may be corresponding to (e.g., associated with) a respective beam of the first wireless device. [0360] The beam sweeping may be for a sidelink unicast link between a pair of a source (e.g., identified/indicated by a source identifier) and a destination (e.g., identified/indicated by a destination identifier). The sidelink unicast link may be refer to direct communication link established between the pair of the source and the destination. The sidelink unicast link may be referred to as a PC5 (Proximity Service Communication 5) link, PC5 unicast link, PC5- RRC connection, and/or the like. For example, PC5-RRC connection may refer to a PC5 link over which a RRC layer is setup/established between the source and the destination. [0361] The beam sweeping may occur before the sidelink unicast link being established or after the sidelink unicast link being established. The beam sweeping may occur during the sidelink unicast link being established, e.g., as a part of establishment procedure of the sidelink unicast link. [0362] FIG.31A and FIG.31B illustrate examples of SL RSs as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. For example, as illustrated in FIG.31A, a first wireless device may transmit a plurality of SL RSs (e.g., a group/set of SL RSs), corresponding to (e.g., associated with) a respective beam sweeping, within a sidelink slot. For example, as illustrated in FIG.31B, a first wireless device may transmit a plurality of SL RSs (e.g., a group/set of SL RSs), corresponding to (e.g., associated with) a respective beam sweeping, via (e.g., across) multiple sidelink slots. The first wireless device may transmit one or more SL RSs via each of sidelink slot in FIG.31B. [0363] The plurality of SL RSs in FIG.31A and/or in FIG.31B are associated with a particular set or group (e.g., beam sweeping) of SL RS transmission. For example, each of the plurality of SL RSs is associated with a same set or a same group. For example, transmissions of SL RSs in a set or a group forms a (corresponding) beam sweeping. For example, a set or a group (e.g., that is associated with one or more SL RSs or that comprises one or more SL RSs) may be associated with a particular beam sweeping of SL RS transmission. Each set or group (or its respective beam sweeping) may be associated with a particular purpose of SL RS transmission. For example, a particular set or group (or its respective beam sweeping) may be for at least one of a periodic transmission of a plurality of SL RSs, aperiodic transmission of a plurality of SL RSs, and/or semi-persistent transmission of the plurality of SL RS, transmission(s) of a plurality of SL RSs for an initial beam pairing procedure, transmission(s) of a plurality of SL RSs for beam management procedure, transmission(s) of a plurality of SL RSs for a beam failure detection/recovery procedure, and/or any combination thereof. For example, the first wireless device may transmit, to a second wireless device, a message comprising a plurality of configurations (e.g., configuration (sl-CSIRS-ResourceConfig IE or the like). Each of the plurality of configurations may be associated with a respective set (or a group) of a plurality of sets (or groups). Each of the plurality of configurations may comprise a respective configuration identifier (additionally or alternatively, a respective set identifier or a respective group identifier) that identifies and/or indicates a respective set (or a group) of the plurality of sets (or groups). Each of the plurality of configurations may comprise parameters indicating one or more SL RSs associated with a respective set (or a group). [0364] In FIG.31A and FIG.31B, the first wireless device may transmit, to a second wireless device, the SL RS(s) with an indication of a set and/or a group associated with the SL RSs. For example, in a sidelink slot in FIG.31A, the first wireless device may transmit, to the second wireless device, a control information (e.g., SCI, a first stage SCI, and/or a second stage SCI) comprising a field value (e.g., set identifier, group identifier, and/or configuration identifier) indicating the set and/or the group associated with the SL RS(s). For example, the first wireless device multiplexes the control information with the SL RS(s) in the sidelink slot. For example, the first wireless device transmits the control information via a sidelink slot where the first wireless device transmits the SL RSs. The second wireless device may determine that the control information (comprising the field value) indicates a transmission of the SL RS(s), associated with the set and/or the group (indicated by the field value in the SCI), being in the sidelink slot. In FIG.31B, for example, in at least one sidelink slot (e.g., the firstly located sidelink slot or all of three sidelink shots) of three shots in FIG.31B, the first wireless device may transmit, to the second wireless device, a control information (e.g., SCI, a first stage SCI, and/or a second stage SCI) comprising a field value (e.g., set identifier, group identifier, and/or configuration identifier) indicating the set and/or the group associated with the SL RSs. The second wireless device may determine that the control information (comprising the field value) indicates a transmission of the SL RSs, associated with the set and/or the group (indicated by the field value in the SCI), being in the at least one sidelink slot and/or in all three sidelink slots. [0365] In example embodiments of present disclosure, a beam sweeping may refer to or comprise a transmission of a plurality of SL RSs from one wireless device to another wireless device. The transmission of the plurality of SL RSs may occur during a plurality symbols via a slot (e.g., FIG.31A) or via/across multiple slots (e.g., FIG.31B). Each of the plurality of SL RS may be associated with or be grouped into a same configuration IE (e.g., sl-CSIRS- ResourceConfig IE or the like), a same set, and/or a same group. The same configuration IE (e.g., sl-CSIRS-ResourceConfig IE or the like), the same set, and/or the same group are identified a respective identifier (e.g., configuration id, set id, group id, and/or the like). [0366] A SL RS may be referred to as or indicated by a different terminology. For example, a SL TCI state, a SL SRI, a SL beam may be used to refer to a SL RS. For example, a SL configuration may comprise a first SL TCI state or a first SL SRI field (or container or IE) that comprises, is linked to, or associated with a first SL RS (e.g., SL CSI RS). In this case, the first SL TCI state or the first SL SRI field (or container or IE) may be used as a terminology to indicate the first SL RS. Likewise, in this case, the first SL RS may be used as a terminology to indicate the first SL TCI state or the first SL SRI field (or container or IE). [0367] Each of the plurality of SL RS may be associated with a respective spatial filter of a wireless device. For example, a first wireless device may: determine to use a first TX spatial filter for transmitting, to a second wireless device, a first SL RS of the plurality of SL RSs; determine to use a second TX spatial filter for transmitting, to a second wireless device, a second SL RS of the plurality of SL RSs; and so on. In this case, the first TX spatial filter and the second TX spatial filter are respectively associated with the first SL RS and the second SL RS. For example, if a first SL RS and a second SL RS are associated with a same TX spatial filter, the first wireless device and/or the second wireless device may determine that the first SL RS is quasi-co located with the second SL RS. If a first SL RS and a second SL RS are linked to or associated with a same SL TCI or SL SRI, the first wireless device and/or the second wireless device may determine that the first SL RS is quasi-co located with the second SL RS. [0368] For example, if a first SL RS and a second SL RS are associated with a same TX spatial filter, the first wireless device and/or the second wireless device may determine that the first SL RS is quasi-co located with the second SL RS. If a first SL TCI (or first SL SRI) and a second SL TCI (or second SL SRI) are linked to or associated with a same SL RS, the first wireless device and/or the second wireless device may determine that the first SL TCI is quasi-co located with the second SL TCI. [0369] For example, a SL TCI may be referred to as or be interchangeably used with a SL TCI state. A SL TCI (or a configuration of the SL TCI) may comprise or is associated with a respective SL TCI identifier. The SL TCI identifier may be used to indicate a respective SL TCI. A SL SRI (or a configuration of the SL SRI) may comprise or is associated with a respective SL SRI identifier. The SL SRI identifier may be used to indicate a respective SL SRI. The SL RS identifier may be used to indicate a respective SL RS. [0370] During the beam sweeping in which a first wireless device transmits, to a second wireless device, a plurality of SL RSs, the second wireless device may determine a preferred SL beam or a preferred SL beam pair. For example, a (e.g., preferred) SL beam or a preferred SL beam pair may be represented by or identified by a respective SL TCI, SL SRI, or SL RS. For example, the second wireless device may determine a measurement quantity (e.g., RSRP or RSRQ) of each of the plurality of SL RSs. The second wireless device may determine or select a preferred SL beam in response to the measurement quantity satisfying one or more conditions (e.g., RSRP value is higher than or equal to a RSRP threshold). [0371] During the beam sweeping, the second wireless device may determine/select its RX spatial filter corresponding to the (e.g., preferred) SL beam. The determined/selected preferred SL beam and the determined/selected RX spatial filter may be referred to as a (e.g., preferred) SL beam pair. The second wireless device may transmit, to the first wireless device, a signal or message (e.g., SL CSI report in FIG.28) indicating the selected (e.g., preferred) SL beam and/or a (e.g., preferred) SL beam pair. For example, the signal or message (e.g., SL CSI report in FIG.28) may comprise a field indicating a SL TCI, SL SRI, or SL RS identifier associated with the selected (e.g., preferred) SL beam and/or a (e.g., preferred) SL beam pair, e.g., as a way to indicate the selected (e.g., preferred) SL beam and/or a (e.g., preferred) SL beam pair. [0372] A wireless device may transmit a plurality of SL RSs, as the beam sweeping, for an (e.g., initial) beam pairing procedure, a beam management (or maintenance) procedure, a beam failure detection/recovery procedure. [0373] The (e.g., initial) beam pairing procedure may comprise a determination of beam pair that is used for a transmission via a sidelink (e.g., unicast link) between a first wireless device and a second wireless device. Before beam-formed SL transmission, the first wireless device and the second wireless device may select a preferred TX beam (e.g., TX spatial filter or precoder) of a transmitter wireless device and a preferred RX beam (e.g., RX spatial filter) of a receiver wireless device for the SL transmission. The transmitter wireless device and the receiver wireless device may be respectively the first wireless device and the second wireless device for the SL transmission that the first wireless device transmits to the second wireless device. The transmitter wireless device and the receiver wireless device may be respectively the first wireless device and the second wireless device for the SL transmission that the first wireless device transmits to the second wireless device via the sidelink between a first wireless device and a second wireless device. The transmitter wireless device and the receiver wireless device may be respectively the second wireless device and the first wireless device for the SL transmission that the second wireless device transmits to the first wireless device via the sidelink between a first wireless device and a second wireless device. [0374] For example, the beam pairing procedure may comprise transmitting, by the first wireless device to the second wireless device, a plurality of SL RSs to select a beam used by the first wireless device to transmit a sidelink transmission to the second wireless device and/or to receive a sidelink transmission from the second wireless device. For example, the first wireless device may transmit the plurality of SL RSs using different beams or using different TX spatial filters (e.g., each of the plurality of SL RSs is associated with a respective beam of the different beams or with a respective TX spatial filter of the different TX spatial filters). The second wireless device may determine measurement quantity(-ies) measured on the plurality of SL RSs and transmit, to the first wireless device, a measurement report (e.g., CSI report). The measurement report may comprise one or more of the measurement quantity(-ies) of the plurality of SL RSs and/or one or more preferred/selected beam (or a SL RS of the plurality of SL RSs). The first wireless device may select or determine, based on the measurement quantity(-ies) and/ro the one or more preferred/selected beam, its TX beam and/or RX beam (that are associated with one of the plurality of SL RSs) for a sidelink transmission with the second wireless device. [0375] For example, the beam pairing procedure may comprise transmitting, by the first wireless device to the second wireless device, a SL RS via (e.g., across) multiple symbols or slots for the second wireless device to sweep its RX beams to select a beam used by the second wireless device to transmit a sidelink transmission to the first wireless device and/or to receive a sidelink transmission from the first wireless device. For example, the first wireless device may transmit a SL RS using a same beam or using a same TX spatial filter via (e.g., across) multiple symbols or slots. The SL RS may be associated with (e.g., may correspond to) a preferred TX beam or RX beam that the first wireless device selects for transmitting a sidelink transmission to the first wireless device or for receiving a sidelink transmission from the second wireless device. While the first wireless device transmits the SL RS via the multiple symbols or multiple slots, the second wireless device may receive the SL RS using different RX beams (e.g., may perform a RX beam sweeping). For example, the second wireless device may determine measurement quantity(-ies) measured on the SL RS per each of RX beams and select one of the RX beams as the one to be used to transmit a sidelink transmission to the first wireless device and/or to receive a sidelink transmission from the first wireless device. [0376] The beam pairing procedure may occur while the first wireless device and the second wireless device establishing a unicast link (e.g., during a unicast link establishment procedure). The beam pairing procedure may occur after the first wireless device and the second wireless device complete to establish a unicast link (e.g., after completing a unicast link establishment procedure). The beam pairing procedure may comprise transmitting, by the first wireless device to the second wireless device, SL configuration parameters. [0377] The beam management procedure may comprise transmission(s) of one or more SL RSs, a transmission(s) of measurement report(s) associated with the one or more SL RSs, and/or determination on whether to maintain or switch a current TX beam (and/or a current RX beam). For example, the beam management may comprise transmitting, by a first wireless device to a second wireless device, one or more SL RSs using one or more TX beams. For example, the beam management procedure may be for a link monitoring on a unicast link established between the first wireless device and the second wireless device. The first wireless device may transmit a message comprising configuration parameters indicating SL RSs used for the beam management procedure. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more parameters indicating a radio resource mapping of each of the SL RSs to respective RE(s), one or more reporting quantities (e.g., L1-RSRP, CQI, RI, PMI, or the like) measured by the each of the SL RSs and to be reported to the first wireless device, and/or the resource scheduling information (e.g., whether the SL RSs are periodic, aperiodic, or semi-persistent transmission). The second wireless device may determine measurement quantities according to the configuration parameters and transmit, to the first wireless device, a measurement report comprising one or more measurement quantities. The first wireless device and/or the second wireless device may switch their TX beam and/or RX beam used for the sidelink transmission between them to another TX beam and/or RX beam based on the measurement report. [0378] The beam failure detection/recovery procedure may enable beamformed sidelink unicast link to quickly and effectively re-form a broken communication link, e.g., without performing the (e.g., initial) beam pairing procedure that may be time consuming. For example, the beam failure detection/recovery procedure may comprise at least one of a beam failure detection (BFD) and/or a candidate beam identification, or a beam failure recovery. [0379] The BFD may be based on a measurement quantity of one or more first SL RSs. For example, a first wireless device may transmit, to a second wireless device, a message (e.g., SL RRC reconfiguration message) indicating the one or more first SL RSs, e.g., among a plurality of first SL RSs, as the ones for the BFD. The first wireless device may transmit to the second wireless device and/or after transmitting the message, the one or more first SL RSs one or more times. The second wireless device may determines a measurement quantity of the received one or more first SL RSs, e.g., for each time the first wireless device transmits the one or more first SL RSs. For example, the second wireless device may determine a beam failure instance if the measurement quantity satisfies one or more BFD conditions. For example, the second wireless device may determine a beam failure instance (e.g., indicating that the BFD occurs) if an RSRP value (or the like) measured on the one or more first SL RSs is below (lower than) a BFD threshold. The second wireless device may determine BFD, e.g., if the beam failure instance occurs, e.g., consecutively, for N times (e.g., N≥1) within a time window. [0380] The candidate beam identification may comprise: monitoring, by the second wireless device, one or more second SL RSs that the first wireless device transmits; and/or determining a candidate beam based on the one or more second SL RSs. For example, the first wireless device may transmit, to the second wireless device, a message (e.g., SL RRC reconfiguration message) indicating the one or more second SL RSs, e.g., among a plurality of second SL RSs, as the ones to monitor for the candidate beam identification. For example, the plurality of the first SL RSs may be same as the plurality of the second SL RSs. The second wireless device may determine a measurement quantity (e.g., RSRP) of each of the one or more second SL RSs. The second wireless device may determine a candidate beam (e.g., SL TCI, SL SRI, SL CSI RS) that is associated with a first SL RS of the one or more second SL RSs, e.g., if the measurement quantity (e.g., RSRP value) of the first SL RS of the one or more second SL RSs satisfies one or more second conditions (e.g., is higher than or equal to a RSRP threshold). The second wireless device may transmit a signal or message (e.g., SCI, MAC CE, and/or RRC message) comprising an identifier of the first SL RS, e.g., as a candidate beam or beam pair that the first wireless device and/or the second wireless device to switch to. For example, the identifier of the first SL RS may be an identifier of SL TCI, SL SRI associated with (or linked to) the first SL RS. [0381] The beam failure recovery may be triggered when beam failure is detected and/or candidate beams are identified. For example, the first wireless device, that transmits (e.g., to the second wireless device) the one or more first SL RSs or one or more second SL RSs, may trigger the beam failure recovery. For example, the second wireless device, that receives (e.g., from the first wireless device) the one or more first SL RSs or one or more second SL RSs, may trigger the beam failure recovery. The beam failure recovery may comprise a transmission of a signal or message comprising the identifier of the first SL RS, e.g., as a candidate beam or beam pair that the first wireless device and/or the second wireless device to switch to. [0382] FIG.32A illustrates an example for SL RS transmission as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. A first wireless device may transmit, to a second wireless device and for the beam sweeping, a SL RS (e.g., SL CSI RS), e.g., each of SL RS(s) (e.g., SL CSI-RS(s)), with SL data (e.g., SL-SCH and/or MAC CE(s) (e.g., that are multiplexed onto PSSCH)) via a sidelink (e.g., same) slot, as illustrated in FIG.32A. For example, the first wireless device may transmit a plurality of SL RSs and SL-SCH (e.g., multiplexed onto PSSCH) in a same sidelink slot. The first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) in FIG.32A or FIG.32B may be for a beam sweeping (e.g., an initial beam pairing procedure, a beam management procedure, and/or a beam failure detection/recovery procedure). The SL RS(s) in FIG.32A or FIG.32B may be at least one of the SL RSs in FIG. 31A or any one of SL RS(s) in one of three sidelink slots in FIG.31B. The sidelink slot in FIG.32A or FIG.32B may be a sidelink slot in FIG.31A or any one of sidelink slots in FIG. 31B. [0383] Referring to FIG.32A, the SL RS may be multiplexed with PSSCH in a sidelink (e.g., same) slot. As an example multiplexing, one or more PSSCHs may be firstly located in the sidelink slot, followed by one or more SL RS(s) in the sidelink (e.g., same) slot in the time domain. As an example multiplexing, SL RS(s) may be firstly located in the sidelink slot, followed by one or more PSSCHs (e.g., comprising SL-SCH) in the sidelink slot in the time domain. As an example multiplexing, one or more PSSCHs (e.g., comprising SL-SCH) may be allocated between two SL RSs in the sidelink slot in the time domain. The transmission of SL RS(s) multiplexed with PSSCH (e.g., comprising SL-SCH) in a same slot may be referred to as a non-standalone transmission of SL RS(s) or the like. In FIG.32A, the first wireless device may transmit PSCCH and/or SCI (e.g., first stage SCI and/or second stage SCI) in the sidelink slot where the first wireless device transmits the SL RS(s) and/or the PSSCH. The PSCCH and/or SCI may comprise one or fields whose values indicates at least one of: a number of SL RS(s) in the sidelink slot, a starting position (symbol) in a slot of each of the SL RS(s) in the sidelink slot, an ending position (symbol), in the sidelink slot, of each of the SL RS(s) in the sidelink slot, or a frequency resource allocation of each of the SL RS(s) in the sidelink slot. [0384] FIG.32B illustrates an example for SL RS transmission as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. A first wireless device may transmit, to a second wireless device, a SL RS (e.g., SL CSI RS), e.g., each of SL RS(s) (e.g., SL CSI-RS(s)), without data (e.g., SL-SCH and/or PSSCH comprising SL-SCH) in a same slot, as illustrated in FIG.32B. The first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) in FIG.32B may be for a beam sweeping (e.g., an initial beam pairing procedure, a beam management procedure, and/or a beam failure detection/recovery procedure). The SL RS(s) in FIG.32B may be at least one of the SL RSs in FIG.31A or any one of SL RS(s) in one of three sidelink slots in FIG.31B. The sidelink slot in FIG.32A may be a sidelink slot in FIG.31A or any one of sidelink slots in FIG.31B. [0385] Referring to FIG.32B, the transmission of SL RS(s) without SL data in a sidelink slot may be referred to as a standalone transmission of SL RS(s) or the like. The SL data may comprise SL-SCH and/or be the one associated with SL-SCH. The SL data may further comprise one or more MAC CEs. [0386] Referring to FIG.32B, the first wireless device may transmit control information (e.g., PSCCH, SCI, first-stage SCI, and/or second-stage SCI) in the sidelink (e.g., same) slot (or in a standalone transmission) where the first wireless device transmits, as the standalone transmission, the SL RS(s). The control information may comprise one or more fields whose values indicates at least one of: a number of SL RS(s) in the sidelink slot, a starting position (symbol) in a slot of each of the SL RS(s) in the sidelink slot, an ending position (symbol), in the sidelink slot, of each of the SL RS(s) in the sidelink slot, or a frequency resource allocation of each of the SL RS(s) in the sidelink slot. [0387] For example, the transmission of SL RS(s) without SL-SCH (e.g., without PSSCH comprising at least SL-SCH) in a sidelink slot may be referred to as a standalone transmission of SL RS(s) or the like. In FIG.32B, the first wireless device may not transmit SL-SCH (e.g., PSSCH comprising SL-SCH or MAC SDU comprising SL-SCH) in the sidelink (e.g., same) slot (or in a standalone transmission) where the first wireless device transmits, as the standalone transmission, the SL RS(s). In FIG.32B, the first wireless device may transmit one or more MAC CE(s) in the sidelink (e.g., same) slot (or in a standalone transmission) where the first wireless device transmits, as the standalone transmission, the SL RS(s). [0388] For example, the transmission of SL RS(s) without PSSCH (e.g., comprising SL-SCH and/or MAC CE(s)) in a sidelink slot may be referred to as a standalone transmission of SL RS(s) or the like. In FIG.32B, the first wireless device may not transmit SL-SCH (e.g., PSSCH comprising SL-SCH or MAC SDU comprising SL-SCH) in the sidelink (e.g., same) slot (or in a standalone transmission) where the first wireless device transmits, as the standalone transmission, the SL RS(s). In FIG.32B, the first wireless device may not transmit one or more MAC CE(s) in the sidelink (e.g., same) slot (or in a standalone transmission) where the first wireless device transmits, as the standalone transmission, the SL RS(s). [0389] Referring to FIG.32B, the standalone transmission of the SL RS(s) may refer to the SL transmission in a slot without any of PSCCH and PSSCH (e.g., SL-SCH and/or MAC CE). For example, the standalone transmission comprise transmission(s) of the SL RS(s) and/or may not comprise transmission(s) of PSCCH and PSSCH (e.g., SL-SCH and/or MAC CE). [0390] In an example, a transmission of a SL RS may be a transmission of a sequence of SL RS (e.g., SL CSI-RS). For example, a sequence of SL RS may be denoted by ⁽^⁾. A first wireless device may generate the sequence ⁽^⁾ as a formular predefined. For example, the sequency ⁽^⁾ may

may be a p^{seudo-random sequence. T(^) may be initialized with Tinit = 42^^4|slot {} ^{symb ^s,f + ^ + 18(2^ID +} 1_{) + ^ID8 mod 2Í^ at the start of each OFDM symbol.}

_{may be the slot number (or index)} within a radio frame. ^ may be the OFDM symbol number (or index) within a slot. In an example, a first wireless device may transmit a SL RS via a symbol with the OFDM symbol number ^ within the slot. In an example, the parameter sl-CSI-RS-FirstSymbol may indicate the OFDM symbol number ^. A second wireless device may receive the SL RS via the symbol within the slot. [0391] A first wireless device may transmit a plurality of SL RSs (e.g., SL CSI RSs) via a plurality of OFDM symbols within a slot (e.g., for SL beam management), for example, as illustrated in FIG.31A, FIG.31B, FIG.32A, and/or FIG.32B. The first wireless device may transmit the plurality of SL RSs with a PSSCH in the slot (e.g., in FIG.32A) or without a PSSCH in the slot (in FIG.32B). The plurality of SL RSs and the PSSCH may occupy (or be carried on, or be scheduled in) different OFDM symbols in the slot, e.g., if the first wireless device transmits the plurality of SL RSs and the PSSCH in the same slot. The plurality of OFDM symbols may be allocated to SL RSs. An indication (e.g., a field of a SCI within the slot) may indicate the presence of SL RSs for beam measurement in transmission of the PSSCH. For example, a 1 bit field in a SCI Format 1-A may inform (or indicate) that transmitted SL RS is used for beam management. [0392] In an example, a first wireless device may transmit, to the second wireless device, SL RS(s) (or at least one or more of the SL RS(s)) for the beam sweeping. The first wireless device may determine resource(s) for transmitting at least one or more of the SL RS(s). The resources may be (e.g., may span, and/or may be located) in one or more symbols (e.g., OFDM symbols) of a slot. The resource(s) may be (e.g., may span, and/or may be located) within L subchannel(s) (e.g., L≥1) in the slot. The resource(s) may comprise one or more REs in the slot over L subchannel(s). The one or more REs may be the one that the first wireless device determines to map the at least one or more of the SL RS(s) and transmits the at least one or more of the SL RS(s). For example, the one or more REs in one or more symbols in the slot over one or more PRBs (or RBs) within L subchannel(s) as the resources to map the SL RS(s) and/or as the resources via which the first wireless device transmits the SL RS(s). [0393] The at least one or more of the SL RS(s)) may be multiplexed with PSCCH and/or PSSCH in a same slot. For the SL RS(s) for the beam sweeping, the at least one or more of the SL RS(s)) may be multiplexed with PSCCH and/or PSSCH in different symbols in the same slot. For the SL RS(s) for the beam sweeping, PSCCH and/or PSSCH may span within the same L subchannel(s) where the at least one or more of the SL RS(s)) spans. [0394] For example, frequency resource(s) of the at least one or more of the SL RS(s)) may be aligned with frequency resources(s) of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH as illustrated in FIG. 32A or FIG.32B. For example, a highest index of PRB carrying the at least one or more of the SL RS(s)) may be the same as a highest index of PRB carrying the PSCCH and/or PSCCH. For example, a lowest index of PRB carrying the at least one or more of the SL RS(s)) may be the same as a lowest index of PRB carrying the PSCCH and/or PSCCH. [0395] For example, time resource(s) of the at least one or more of the SL RS(s)) may be different (e.g., may be disjoint, may not overlap with) time resource(s) of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH as illustrated in FIG.32A or FIG.32B. The time resource(s) of the at least one or more of the SL RS(s)) may be in one or more first symbols in the slot. The time resource(s) of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH may be in one or more second symbols in the slot. The one or more first symbols may be different from the one or more second symbols. [0396] FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and FIG.33D illustrate examples of sidelink channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and FIG.33D are the examples of FIG.32A and/or FIG.32B. [0397] In FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and/or FIG.33D, the radio resource(s) (e.g., time and frequency resource and/or resource assignment/allocation) of PSCCH, PSSCH (e.g., for FIG.33A and/or FIG.33B), and/or SL RS(s) do not overlap with each other. For example, the PSCCH is multiplexed in non-overlapping resources with the PSSCH in a same slot as shown in FIG.33A and/or FIG.33B and/or is multiplexed in non-overlapping resources with the SL RS(s) in the same slot as shown in FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and/or FIG.33D. For example, the PSSCH is multiplexed in non-overlapping resources with the SL RS(s) in the same slot as shown in in FIG.33A, FIG.33B. The wireless device may transmit (or may start to transmit) the PSCCH and/or the PSCCH from a same symbol in the slot (e.g., a symbol after or next the AGC symbol or a symbol located secondly in the slot) as shown in FIG.33A and/or FIG.33B. The wireless device may transmit (or may start to transmit) the SL RS(s) via one or more symbols. The one or more symbols may be located and/or occur after the last symbol of the PSCCH or PSSCH until the symbol(s) allocated (determined) for guard time and/or PSFCH transmission in the slot. [0398] In FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and/or FIG.33D, the number of symbols for transmitting the PSCCH may be (pre-)configured (e.g., per a resource pool as resource pool configuration parameter(s)). For example, resource pool configuration parameter(s) that the first wireless device receives may indicate the number of symbols for transmitting the PSCCH. For example, the number of symbols may be 2 or 3 symbols. For example, the number of symbols for transmitting the PSCCH is different depending on whether the first wireless device transmits, e.g., for beam sweeping, the SL RS(s) in the same slot. For example, resource pool configuration parameter(s) may comprise at least two parameters; a first parameter indicating a first number of symbols for transmitting the PSCCH without the SL RS(s) (e.g., that are for beam sweeping or for beam management as illustrated in FIG. 33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and/or FIG.33D) in the same slot (e.g., in which SL CSI-RS for SCI acquisition may be scheduled as illustrated in FIG.29); and/or a second parameter indicating a second number of symbols for transmitting the PSCCH with the SL RS(s) (e.g., that are for beam sweeping or for beam management as illustrated in FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and/or FIG.33D) in the same slot. [0399] FIG.33A illustrates an example of sidelink channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG.33A is an example of SL RS(s) transmission with PSSCH and PSCCH in the same slot. For example, FIG.33A may be an example of the non- standalone transmission of the SL RS(s) in FIG.32A. [0400] In FIG.33A, in the frequency domain, the PSCCH may occupy a (pre-)configured number of M PRBs (e.g., M ≥1). For example, resource pool configuration parameter(s) may indicate M used for a resource pool associated with (e.g., configured by) the resource pool configuration parameter(s). The M PRBs of the PSCCH may start from a predefined or configured PRB (e.g., a lowest PRB in the frequency domain) within sub-channel(s). An example M may be 10, 12, 15, 20 or 25 PRBs. For example, the PSCCH may be allocated, assigned, and/or contained within one sub-channel. [0401] For example, the sub-channel(s) may be occupied by the PSSCH (e.g., associated PSSCH indicated/scheduled by the PSCCH) in the same slot. For example, the M PRBs of the PSCCH may be confined within the sub-channel(s) allocated for the PSSCH in the same slot. For example, the wireless device may determine the PRBs of the SL RS(s) to be aligned with the PRBs of the PSSCH. [0402] For example, the sub-channel(s) may be occupied by the SL RS(s) (e.g., associated SL RS(s) indicated/scheduled by the PSCCH) in the same slot. For example, the M PRBs of the PSCCH may be confined within the sub-channel(s) allocated for the SL RS(s) in the same slot. For example, the SL RS(s) may occupy a (pre-)configured number of N PRBs (e.g., N ≥1). For example, resource pool configuration parameter(s) may indicate N used for a resource pool associated with (e.g., configured by) the resource pool configuration parameter(s). For example, configuration parameter(s) of the SL RS(s) may indicate N. For example, the M PRBs of the PSCCH may start from a lowest PRB within the N PRBs and/or the sub-channel(s) assigned and/or allocated for the SL RS(s). For example, the wireless device may determine the PRBs of the PSSCH to be aligned with the PRBs of the SL RS(s). [0403] In FIG.33A, for example, the lowest index of the PRBs of the SL RS(s) may be same as the lowest index of the PRBs of the PSSCH. For example, the highest index of the PRBs of the SL RS(s) may be same as the highest index of the PRBs of the PSSCH. For example, the lowest index of the PRBs of the SL RS(s) may be same as the lowest index of the PRBs of the PSCCH. For example, the lowest index of the PRBs of the PSCCH may be same as the lowest index of the PRBs of the PSSCH. [0404] In FIG.33A, the first wireless device may determine the resource allocation of PSSCH (e.g., time domain and/or frequency domain resource allocation) according to one or more example embodiments of the present disclosure. The first wireless device may transmit (e.g., start to transmit) the PSSCH from a predefined or configured symbol (e.g., a symbol located secondly in the slot) in the slot. The number of PSSCH symbols may depend on the number of symbols in a slot, whether PSFCH is in the slot, and/or a number of symbols carrying the SL RS(s). For example, the wireless device may transmit the PSSCH in 2 to 12 consecutive symbols. In the 2 or 3 symbols which carry PSCCH, the PSSCH can be multiplexed in the frequency domain with PSCCH. In the symbols without PSCCH, the PSSCH may span (e.g., all) sub-channel(s) that are assigned/allocated to the PSSCH as shown in FIG.33A. The symbol after the last PSSCH symbol may be a starting symbol of the transmission of the SL RS(s). [0405] In FIG.33A, the first wireless device may determine the resource allocation of SL RS(s) (e.g., time domain and/or frequency domain resource allocation) based on the resource allocation of the PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the same slot. For example, the first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) from a predefined or configured symbol (e.g., a symbol located after the PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the slot) in the slot. The number of SL RS(s) symbols may depend on the number of symbols in a slot, whether PSFCH is in the slot, and/or a number of symbols carrying the PSCCH and/or PSSCH. For example, the wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) via the remaining symbol in the slot. The first wireless device may determine the remaining symbol by excluding the AGC symbol and/or one or more symbols allocated for or carrying PSCCH, PSSCH, PSFCH, and/or Guard time from (e.g., all) symbols available in the slot as shown in FIG.33A. [0406] In FIG.33A, the first wireless device may determine the resource allocation of PSCCH and/or PSSCH (e.g., time domain and/or frequency domain resource allocation) based on the resource allocation of the SL RS(s) in the same slot. For example, the first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) from a predefined or configured symbol (e.g., a symbol located after the PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the slot) in the slot. The number of PSCCH and/or PSSCH symbols may depend on the number of symbols in a slot, whether PSFCH is in the slot, and/or a number of symbols carrying the SL RS(s). For example, the wireless device may transmit the PSCCH and/or PSSCH via the remaining symbol in the slot. The first wireless device may determine the remaining symbol by excluding the AGC symbol and/or one or more symbols allocated for or carrying SL RS(s) and/or Guard time from (e.g., all) symbols available in the slot as shown in FIG.33A. [0407] FIG.33B illustrates an example of sidelink channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG.33B is an example of SL RS(s) transmission with PSSCH and PSCCH in the same slot. For example, FIG.33B may be an example of the non- standalone transmission of the SL RS(s) in FIG.32A. [0408] In FIG.33B, in the frequency domain, the PSCCH may occupy a (pre-)configured number of M PRBs (e.g., M ≥1). For example, resource pool configuration parameter(s) may indicate M used for a resource pool associated with (e.g., configured by) the resource pool configuration parameter(s). The M PRBs of the PSCCH may start from a predefined or configured PRB (e.g., a lowest PRB in the frequency domain) within sub-channel(s). An example M may be 10, 12, 15, 20 or 25 PRBs. For example, the PSCCH may be allocated, assigned, and/or contained within one sub-channel. For example, the sub-channel(s) may be occupied by the SL RS(s) (e.g., associated SL RS(s) indicated/scheduled by the PSCCH) in the same slot. For example, the M PRBs of the PSCCH may be confined within the sub- channel(s) allocated for the SL RS(s) in the same slot. For example, the SL RS(s) may occupy a (pre-)configured number of N PRBs (e.g., N ≥1). For example, resource pool configuration parameter(s) may indicate N used for a resource pool associated with (e.g., configured by) the resource pool configuration parameter(s). For example, configuration parameter(s) of the SL RS(s) may indicate N. [0409] In FIG.33B, the wireless device may determine the PRBs of the PSCCH to be aligned with the PRB(s) of the SL RS(s). For example, the M PRBs of the PSCCH may start from a lowest PRB within the N PRBs and/or the sub-channel(s) assigned and/or allocated for the SL RS(s). For example, the lowest index of the PRBs of the SL RS(s) may be same as the lowest index of the PRBs of the PSCCH. [0410] In FIG.33B, the wireless device may determine the PRBs of the PSSCH to be aligned with the PRB(s) of the SL RS(s). For example, the highest index of the PRB of the SL RS(s) may be same as the highest index of the PRBs of the PSSCH. For example, the wireless device may determine the number of PRBs allocated for the PSSCH and/or location and/or indices of the PRBs allocated for the PSSCH based on the PRBs allocated for the PSCCH and/or SL RS(s). For example, the number of PRBs of the PSSCH may be (N-M) PRBs. [0411] In FIG.33B, the lowest PRB index among one or more first PRBs (e.g., N-M PRBs) of the PSSCH may be based on the highest PRB index among one or more second PRBs (e.g., M PRBs) of the PSCCH. For example, the lowest PRB index (e.g., denoted by index X, X≥1) of the PSSCH is a next index of the highest PRB index (e.g., denoted by index X-1) of the PSCCH. [0412] In FIG.33B, the first wireless device may determine the resource allocation of PSSCH in time domain to be aligned with the PSCCH. For example, the symbol(s) carrying the PSSCH may be the same as the symbols carrying the PSCCH in the same slot. For example, the first wireless device may transmit the PSSCH from a predefined or configured symbol (e.g., a symbol located secondly in the slot) in the slot. The symbol after the last PSSCH symbol and/or after the last PSCCH symbol may be a starting symbol of the transmission of the SL RS(s). [0413] In FIG.33B, the first wireless device may determine the resource allocation of SL RS(s) (e.g., time domain and/or frequency domain resource allocation) based on the resource allocation of the PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the same slot. For example, the first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) from a predefined or configured symbol (e.g., a symbol located after the PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the slot) in the slot. The number of SL RS(s) symbols may depend on the number of symbols in a slot, whether PSFCH is in the slot, and/or a number of symbols carrying the PSCCH and/or PSSCH. For example, the wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) via the remaining symbol in the slot. The first wireless device may determine the remaining symbol by excluding the AGC symbol and/or one or more symbols allocated for or carrying PSCCH, PSSCH, PSFCH, and/or Guard time from (e.g., all) symbols available in the slot as shown in FIG.33A. [0414] In FIG.33B, the first wireless device may determine the resource allocation of PSCCH and/or PSSCH (e.g., time domain and/or frequency domain resource allocation) based on the resource allocation of the SL RS(s) in the same slot. For example, the first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) from a predefined or configured symbol (e.g., a symbol located after the PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the slot) in the slot. The number of PSCCH and/or PSSCH symbols may depend on the number of symbols in a slot, whether PSFCH is in the slot, and/or a number of symbols carrying the SL RS(s). For example, the wireless device may transmit the PSCCH and/or PSSCH via the remaining symbol in the slot. The first wireless device may determine the remaining symbol by excluding the AGC symbol and/or one or more symbols allocated for or carrying SL RS(s) and/or Guard time from (e.g., all) symbols available in the slot as shown in FIG.33B. [0415] FIG.33C illustrates an example of sidelink channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG.33C is an example of SL RS(s) transmission with PSCCH (e.g., and without PSSCH) in the same slot. For example, FIG.33C may be an example of the non-standalone transmission of the SL RS(s) in FIG.32A. For example, FIG. 33C may be an example of the standalone transmission of the SL RS(s) in FIG.32B. [0416] In FIG.33C, in the frequency domain, the SL RS(s) may occupy a (pre-)configured number of N PRBs (e.g., N ≥1). For example, resource pool configuration parameter(s) may indicate N used for a resource pool associated with (e.g., configured by) the resource pool configuration parameter(s). For example, configuration parameter(s) of the SL RS(s) may indicate N. For example, the PSCCH may be allocated, assigned, and/or contained within sub- channel(s) occupied by the SL RS(s) (e.g., associated SL RS(s) indicated/scheduled by the PSCCH) in the same slot. For example, the PSCCH may be confined within the sub- channel(s) allocated for the SL RS(s) in the same slot. For example, the PSCCH and SL RS(s) in the same slot occupy the same sub-channel(s) and/or are allocated to the same PRBs (e.g., N PRBs) in the same slot. For example, the N PRBs may start from a predefined or configured PRB (e.g., a lowest PRB in the frequency domain) within sub-channel(s). An example N may be 10, 12, 15, 20 or 25 PRBs. For example, the PSCCH and the SL RS(s) may occupy one subchannel. [0417] In FIG.33C, the first wireless device may determine the resource allocation of SL RS(s) (e.g., time domain and/or frequency domain resource allocation) based on the resource allocation of the PSCCH in the same slot. For example, the first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) from a predefined or configured symbol (e.g., a symbol located after the PSCCH in the slot) in the slot. The number of SL RS(s) symbols may depend on the number of symbols in a slot, whether PSFCH is in the slot, and/or a number of symbols carrying the PSCCH. For example, the wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) via the remaining symbol in the slot. The first wireless device may determine the remaining symbol by excluding the AGC symbol and/or one or more symbols allocated for or carrying PSCCH, PSFCH, and/or Guard time from (e.g., all) symbols available in the slot as shown in FIG.33C. [0418] In FIG.33C, the first wireless device may determine the resource allocation of PSCCH (e.g., time domain and/or frequency domain resource allocation) based on the resource allocation of the SL RS(s) in the same slot. For example, the first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) from a predefined or configured symbol (e.g., a symbol located after the PSCCH in the slot) in the slot. The number of PSCCH symbols may depend on the number of symbols in a slot, whether PSFCH is in the slot, and/or a number of symbols carrying the SL RS(s). For example, the wireless device may transmit the PSCCH via the remaining symbol in the slot. The first wireless device may determine the remaining symbol by excluding the AGC symbol and/or one or more symbols allocated for or carrying SL RS(s) and/or Guard time from (e.g., all) symbols available in the slot as shown in FIG.33C. [0419] FIG.33D illustrates an example of sidelink channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG.33D is an example of SL RS(s) transmission with PSCCH (e.g., and without PSSCH) in the same slot. For example, FIG.33D may be an example of the non-standalone transmission of the SL RS(s) in FIG.32A. For example, FIG. 33C may be an example of the standalone transmission of the SL RS(s) in FIG.32B. [0420] In FIG.33D, in the frequency domain, the PSCCH may occupy a (pre-)configured number of M PRBs (e.g., M ≥1). For example, resource pool configuration parameter(s) may indicate M used for a resource pool associated with (e.g., configured by) the resource pool configuration parameter(s). The M PRBs of the PSCCH may start from a predefined or configured PRB (e.g., a lowest PRB in the frequency domain) within sub-channel(s). An example M may be 10, 12, 15, 20 or 25 PRBs. For example, the PSCCH may be allocated, assigned, and/or contained within one sub-channel. [0421] For example, the sub-channel(s) may be occupied by the SL RS(s) (e.g., associated SL RS(s) indicated/scheduled by the PSCCH) in the same slot. For example, the M PRBs of the PSCCH may be confined within the sub-channel(s) allocated for the SL RS(s) in the same slot. For example, the SL RS(s) may occupy a (pre-)configured number of N PRBs (e.g., N ≥1). For example, resource pool configuration parameter(s) may indicate N used for a resource pool associated with (e.g., configured by) the resource pool configuration parameter(s). For example, configuration parameter(s) of the SL RS(s) may indicate N. For example, the M PRBs of the PSCCH may start from a lowest PRB within the N PRBs and/or the sub-channel(s) assigned and/or allocated for the SL RS(s). For example, the wireless device may determine the PRBs of the PSSCH to be aligned with the PRBs of the SL RS(s). [0422] In FIG.33D, in the 2 or 3 symbols which carry PSCCH, the SL RS(s) can be multiplexed in the frequency domain with PSCCH. In the symbols without PSCCH, the SL RS(s) may span (e.g., all) sub-channel(s) that are assigned/allocated to the SL RS(s)as shown in FIG.33D. The symbol after the AGC symbol may be a starting symbol of the transmission of the SL RS(s). [0423] In FIG.33D, the first wireless device may determine the resource allocation of SL RS(s) (e.g., time domain and/or frequency domain resource allocation) based on the resource allocation of the PSCCH in the same slot. For example, the first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) from a predefined or configured symbol (e.g., a symbol located after the PSCCH in the slot) in the slot. The number of SL RS(s) symbols may depend on the number of symbols in a slot, whether PSFCH is in the slot and/or a number of symbols carrying the PSCCH. For example, the wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) via the remaining symbol in the slot. The first wireless device may determine the remaining symbol by excluding the AGC symbol and/or one or more symbols allocated for or carrying PSCCH, PSFCH, and/or Guard time from (e.g., all) symbols available in the slot as shown in FIG. 33D. [0424] In FIG.33D, the first wireless device may determine the resource allocation of PSCCH (e.g., time domain and/or frequency domain resource allocation) based on the resource allocation of the SL RS(s) in the same slot. For example, the first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) from a predefined or configured symbol (e.g., a symbol located after the PSCCH in the slot) in the slot. The number of PSCCH symbols may depend on the number of symbols in a slot, whether PSFCH is in the slot, and/or a number of symbols carrying the SL RS(s). For example, the wireless device may transmit the PSCCH via the remaining symbol in the slot. The first wireless device may determine the remaining symbol by excluding the AGC symbol and/or one or more symbols allocated for or carrying SL RS(s) and/or Guard time from (e.g., all) symbols available in the slot as shown in FIG.33D. [0425] In existing technologies, the 1^st symbol (e.g., with a symbol index 0) and/or firstly occurred symbol in a slot (e.g., a single symbol) is assigned as the AGC symbol. In existing technologies, the transmitting wireless device and/or sensing (or monitoring or receiving) wireless device may determine (e.g., assume) that a signal strength (or transmission power of a transmitting wireless device) during the slot is static (e.g., maintained/kept as the same or constant) and varies dynamically across slots (e.g., different and/or adjacent slots). For example, in the existing technologies, a power transition (e.g., transmission power level change) may occur across adjacent (and/or consecutive) slots, e.g., between a AGC symbol of a slot and a guard symbol of a preceding slot. For example, in the existing technologies, power transition (e.g., transmission power level change) may not occur (e.g., may be substantially negligible to calibrate the power at the receiver) during a slot (e.g., after a AGC symbol of the slot, between two AGC symbols in the same slot, and/or between two AGC symbols across adjacent slots). For example, the AGC symbol (e.g., located at the 1^st symbol and/or firstly occurred symbol in a slot) is for the receiving wireless device or sensing wireless device to calibrate its receiver’s gain and/or maintain/keep a relative constant output signal against the varying input signal (e.g., varying receiving power level or power transition across the adjacent slots). [0426] FIG.34 illustrates an example of transmission power and frequency in a slot as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG.34 shows the implementation of the existing technologies applied to SL RS(s) are transmitted with PSCCH and/or PSSCH in a TDM manner (e.g., FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and/or FIG.33D). [0427] A first figure on the top of FIG.34 shows a transmission power (e.g., measured power at the transmitter) of sidelink transmissions or a reception power (e.g., measured power at the receiver) of sidelink transmissions changed over time. A second figure on the bottom of FIG.34 illustrates a frequency (and/or subchannel/PRB location) of sidelink transmissions as a function of time, e.g., time-frequency resource allocation of each channel and/or symbol (e.g., PSCCH, PSSCH, and/or SL RS(s)). The first figure and the second figure in FIG.34 are timely aligned to each other, e.g., as shown in the slot boundary between slot n-1 and slot n and the one between slot n and slot n+1 (e.g., n is an integer number). For example, FIG.34 shows that according to resource allocation of each channel, the transmission power (or reception power) changes. [0428] In FIG.34, at least one symbol (e.g., the last symbol and/or lastly occurred symbol in a slot) may be assigned as guard symbol(s) to provide a time gap for a wireless device to switch from a transmission mode to a reception mode (or vice versa). For example, in FIG. 34, the last symbol of each of slot n-1 and slot n is assigned as the guard symbol. [0429] For example, in FIG.34, the firstly occurred symbol in each of slot n and slot n+1 is assigned as a AGC symbol. For example, in FIG.34, a power transition may occur between slot n-1 and slot n (e.g., during a guard symbol in slot n-1 and/or during AGC symbol in slot n) and/or between slot n and slot n+1 (e.g., during a guard symbol in slot n and/or during AGC symbol in slot n+1). [0430] For example, in FIG.34, a second wireless device (e.g., a receiving and/or sensing wireless device) may calibrate the power at the receiver side during an AGC symbol. For example, for calibrating the power (e.g., may referred to as AGC training), the second wireless device detects the energy/power of a signal in the channel during the AGC symbol and applies a hardware gain to maximize the signal amplitude to the dynamic range of the analog to digital convertor (ADC) at the receiver. [0431] A problem arises when a first wireless device transmits, using different power, SL RS(s) with PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the same slot. For example, a first wireless device transmits the SL RS(s) with PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the same slot in a TDM manner (e.g., as illustrated in FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and/or FIG.33D). Each of transmissions (e.g., SL RS(s) with PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the same slot) may have or be associated with a respective performance metric (e.g., QoS requirement, detection rate, false alarm rate, miss- detection rate, etc) to be guaranteed or achieved. To guarantee the respective performance metric, the first wireless device may determine transmission powers for different channels (e.g., SL RS(s) with PSCCH and/or PSSCH) in a slot, which results in a power transition during the slot, e.g., when a first transmission (e.g., SL RS(s), PSCCH, and/or PSSCH) is switched to a second transmission (e.g., SL RS(s), PSCCH, and/or PSSCH which is different from the first transmission) during the slot. [0432] The implementation of the existing technologies results in a power transition within a slot. The power transition may occur between the first transmission and the second transmission within slot n (e.g., after AGC symbol). In the existing technologies, the second wireless device may not be aware of the power transition within slot n. In the existing technologies, there is no AGC symbol for the power transition caused by two different powers for two different transmissions within a same slot. This power transition results in an inaccurate gain control of AGC, e.g., for the second wireless device to receive, detect, and/or decode the second transmission. For example, the inaccurate gain control of AGC causes the receiver to include large amount of unwanted (e.g., interference and/or noise) signal and/or to clip a received signal (e.g., a received signal with a large power). As a result, a decoding failure occurs and/or the received signal is distorted (e.g., with information loss). [0433] In FIG.34, a power transition occurs within slot n (e.g., during one or more symbols, in slot n, where the first wireless device switches between PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) and SL RS(s) transmission comprising at least one of SL CSI-RS(s) or SL SSB(s). The first wireless device may schedule and/or transmit a first transmission of PSSCH and/or PSSCH and a second transmission of SL RS(s) in slot n. The first wireless device may determine a first transmission power (e.g., power for PSCCH and/or PSSCH in slot n in FIG.34) used for the first transmission of PSSCH and/or PSSCH. The first wireless device may determine a second transmission (e.g., power for SL RS(s) in slot n in FIG.34) used for the second transmission of SL RS(s). the first transmission power may be different from the second transmission power. The first wireless device may transmit an AGC signal via a AGC symbol (e.g., with symbol index 0 or firstly located/occurred symbol) in slot n. [0434] The AGC signal may be a duplication of resource elements of the next (immediately following) OFDM symbol (e.g., with a symbol index 1) in slot n. In an example, the AGC signal in the AGC symbol (e.g., symbol #0) may be a duplication of signal scheduled/transmitted in symbol #1 in slot n. In an example, the AGC signal may comprise a pre-defined signal/sequence and/or dummy information. The first wireless device may determine a transmission power of the AGC signal as the same as the first transmission power used for the first transmission of PSSCH and/or PSSCH. [0435] The second wireless device that monitors and/or senses one or more sidelink transmissions in slot n may perform the AGC training using the AGC signal received from the first wireless device via the AGC symbol. For example, the second wireless device adjusts an AGC gain of the second wireless device’s receiver for receiving the one or more sidelink transmission (started from the next symbol (e.g., symbol #1) of the AGC symbol) in slot n. The second wireless device may determine that the first wireless device transmits the AGC signal and the one or more sidelink transmission in the same slot (e.g., slot n) using the same power. [0436] In FIG.34, the first wireless device may transmit the second transmission of the SL RS(s) within (e.g., and/or during and/or in) slot n. For example, the second transmission of the SL RS(s) may occur after the AGC symbol (e.g., transmission of the AGC signal) and/or after the first transmission of the PSCCH and/or PSSCH within (e.g., and/or during and/or in) slot n. The first wireless device may use, for and/or during the second transmission, the second transmission power that may be different from the first transmission power. This power change from the first transmission power to the second transmission power causes a sudden power transition within slot n at the receiver of the second wireless device. In this case, the AGC training performed using the AGC symbol according to the existing technologies is not applicable for the reception of the second transmission due to the difference of the first transmission power and the second transmission power. [0437] FIG.34 is an example figure of a sudden power transition (e.g., sudden power increase) within slot n, e.g., when a transmission power that the first wireless device determines for SL RS(s) transmission is higher than a transmission power that the first wireless device determines for PSCCH and/or PSSCH in slot n. The same problem (e.g., sudden power transition within a slot) occurs, e.g., when a transmission power that the first wireless device determines for SL RS(s) transmission is lower than a transmission power that the first wireless device determines for PSCCH and/or PSSCH in slot n. [0438] FIG.34 illustrates a power transition within a slot as an example in which the first transmission of PSCCH and/or PSSCH occurs before the second transmission of the SL RS(s). The same problem occurs when the second transmission of the SL RS(s) occurs before the first transmission of PSCCH and/or PSSCH in the same slot. [0439] Embodiments of the present disclosure are related to an approach for inaccurate gain control of AGC caused by a power transition within a slot. These and other features of the present disclosure are described further below. [0440] In an example embodiment, a wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) a first transmission power of the PSCCH and a second transmission power of the SL RS(s) so that there is no sudden power transition when the transmission of the PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) is switched to the transmission of SL RS(s) in a same slot. For example, the wireless device may determine the first transmission power based on a number of resource blocks for the transmission of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH). For example, the wireless device may determine the second transmission power based on a number of resource blocks for the transmission of SL RS(s). The wireless device may further determine a third transmission power to be used for the transmission of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) and/or SL RS(s). The wireless device may transmit the PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) and the SL RS(s) in the same slot using the same transmission power, e.g., the third transmission power. [0441] In an example embodiment, a wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) a first transmission power of the PSCCH and a second transmission power of the SL RS(s) so that there is no sudden power transition when the transmission of the PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) is switched to the transmission of SL RS(s) in a same slot. For example, the wireless device may determine the second transmission power of the transmission of SL RS(s). The wireless device may determine (e.g., adjust, use, and/or change) the first transmission power based on the second transmission power. For example, the wireless device may determine the first transmission power as the same as the second transmission power. [0442] In an example embodiment, a wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) a first amplitude scaling factor of sidelink transmission of the PSCCH and a second amplitude scaling factor of sidelink transmission of the SL RS(s) so that there is no sudden power transition when the transmission of the PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) is switched to the transmission of SL RS(s) in a same slot. For example, the wireless device may determine the second transmission power of the transmission of SL RS(s). The wireless device may determine (e.g., adjust, use, and/or change) the first amplitude scaling factor based on the second transmission power, e.g., in order to (e.g., in a way to) conform to the second transmission power. The wireless device may determine (e.g., adjust, use, and/or change) the second amplitude scaling factor based on the second transmission power, e.g., in order to (e.g., in a way to) conform to the second transmission power. For example, the wireless device may determine the first amplitude scaling factor as the same as the amplitude scaling factor. [0443] In an example embodiment, a pair of wireless devices may share a power offset for the transmission of the SL RS(s). For example, a first wireless device may transmit, to a second wireless device, a message comprising a parameter indicating the power offset. The power offset may indicate a power difference between the first transmission power used for the transmission of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) and the second transmission power used for the transmission of SL RS(s) in the same slot. The first wireless device may determine the first transmission power and the second transmission power such that the power difference between the first transmission power and the second transmission power may be the power offset. The second wireless device may adjust its AGC using the (preconfigured) power offset within the slot, when the first transmission is switched to the second transmission in the same slot. [0444] Example embodiments of the present disclosure may provide enhancement for accurate control of AGC at a receiver of a sidelink wireless device. [0445] For example, in one or more example embodiments of the present disclosure provide an enhanced power control for transmission of SL RS(s) multiplexed with one or more different sidelink transmissions (e.g., PSCCH and/or PSSCH) in a same slot. As a result, the transmitting wireless device may keep the transmission power at a constant level while transmitting SL RS(s) and the one or more different sidelink transmissions in a same slot. Thus, the receiving wireless device doesn’t suffer from a sudden power transition when the sidelink transmission is switched between transmission of SL RS(s) and the one or more different sidelink transmissions. Thus, the receiving wireless device keep the accurate gain control of AGC that prevent its receiver from including large amount of unwanted (e.g., interference and/or noise) signal and/or from clipping a received signal (e.g., a received signal with a large power). As a result, example embodiments improve the decoding failure and/or signal distortion (e.g., information loss) occurred in the existing technologies. [0446] For example, in one or more example embodiments of the present disclosure provide an enhanced gain control of AGC for transmission of SL RS(s) multiplexed with one or more different sidelink transmissions in a same slot. For example, in one or more example embodiments of the present disclosure, the receiving wireless device may further perform AGC training and/or adjust its gain control parameter of the AGC based on a (pre-)configured (and/or predefined) power offset and/or AGC signal received via a new AGC symbol introduced in the present disclosure. Thus, the receiving wireless device properly adapts its receiver’s gain to the change of transmission powers within the same slot, which prevents its receiver from including large amount of unwanted (e.g., interference and/or noise) signal and/or from clipping a received signal (e.g., a received signal with a large power). As a result, example embodiments improve the decoding failure and/or signal distortion (e.g., information loss) occurred in the existing technologies. [0447] In the present disclosure, a X-Y transmission occasion refers to a transmission occasion where a sidelink transmission of X is transmitted with a sidelink transmission Y with different frequencies (e.g., different PRB). For example, in FIG.29, FIG.33A, and FIG.33B, transmission occasion(s) (e.g., comprising corresponding one or more symbols of a slot), in which PSCCH and PSSCH are multiplexed in the frequency domain, may be referred to as PSCCH-PSSCH (or PSSCH-PSCCH) transmission occasion in example embodiments of the present disclosure. For example, in FIG.33D, transmission occasion(s) (e.g., comprising corresponding one or more symbols of a slot), in which PSCCH and SL RS(s) are multiplexed in the frequency domain, may be referred to as PSCCH-SLRS (or SLRS-PSCCH) transmission occasion in example embodiments of the present disclosure. Likewise, a X transmission occasion refers to a transmission occasion where a sidelink transmission of X is transmitted without frequency domain multiplexing with other transmission(s). For example, in FIG.29 and FIG.33A, a time duration (e.g., one or more slots and/or one or more symbols occur) between the end time of the PSCCH transmission and a starting time of the SL RS(s) may be referred to as a PSSCH transmission occasion. For example, FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, and/or FIG.33D, a time duration (e.g., one or more slots and/or one or more symbols occur) where the first wireless device transmits SL RS(s) without multiplexing with PSCCH and/or PSSCH may be referred to as a SL RS transmission occasion. [0448] In first example embodiments, a first wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) in a same slot may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) a first transmission power of the PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) and a second transmission power of the SL RS(s). For example, the first wireless device may determine the first transmission power based on a number of resource blocks for the transmission of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH). For example, the wireless device may determine the second transmission power based on a number of resource blocks for the transmission of SL RS(s). The wireless device may further determine a third transmission power to be used for the transmission of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) and/or SL RS(s), e.g., for all the transmission occasions in the same slot with the same transmission power. [0449] For example, the third transmission power is a larger transmission power of the first transmission power and the second transmission power. This may be a case of power boosting for a transmission having a smaller transmission power among the first transmission and the second transmission. For example, the first wireless device may determine the third transmission power used for a SL RS(s) transmission on a resource pool in symbols where a PSCCH and/or PSSCH are not transmitted in (e.g., are not multiplexed in frequency) SL RS transmission occasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier Î as

[0450] For example, (e.g., for the case of FIG.33A), the first wireless device may transmit SL RS(s) with the third transmission power ^_TX1(^) via SL RS transmission occasion i in a slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34) and/or transmit PSSCH with the third transmission power ^_TX1(^) via PSSCH transmission occasion i in the slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34). The first wireless device may split the power ^_PSSCH(^), e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE t^{ransmits the PSSCH with non-zero power. The first wireless device may determine a power} ^_{PSSCH2(^) for a PSSCH transmission on a resource pool in the symbols in the slot (e.g., slot n} in FIG.34) where a corresponding PSCCH is transmitted in PSCCH-PSSCH transmission o^{ccasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier Î as ^ÄÁÁ()}

⁺ ^_{TX1(^) [dBm]. For example,}

_{may be a number of resource blocks for the} c^{orresponding PSSCH transmission in PSSCH transmission occasion ^. For example,} H_PSCCH _{RB (^) may be a number of resource blocks for the corresponding PSCCH transmission in} P^{SCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^. The first wireless device may split the power} ^_{ÄÁÁ()1(^), e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the PSSCH with} non-zero power. The first wireless device may determine a power ^_ÄÁ(()(^) used for transmitting PSCCH of a PSCCH transmission on a resource pool in PSCCH-PSSCH t^{ransmission occasion ^ in the slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34) as ^ÄÁ(()(^) =}

_{For example, the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission} occasion ^ may comprise a symbol in which the first wireless device transmits a PSCCH and/or a PSSCH. The first wireless device may determine ^_ÄÁÁ()(^) based on example embodiment(s) in the present disclosure. [0451] For example, (e.g., for the case of FIG.33A), ^_TX1a may be a transmission power of PSSCH (e.g., the first transmission power). For example, the first wireless device may determine ^_TX1a used for a SL RS(s) transmission on a resource pool in symbols of PSSCH transmission occasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier Î as ^_TX1a(^) = ^^^4^_PSSCH,¡(^), ^_PSSCH,=>(^)8. ^_PSSCH,¡(^) and ^_PSSCH,=>(^) may be transmission powers determined by the first wireless device for PSSCH transmission via the PSSCH transmission occasion i (e.g., in FIG.33A). [0452] For example, ^_CMAX is a transmission power limit (e.g., a total configured maximum output power) of the first wireless device. For example, the first wireless device may receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising value(s). the value(s) may indicate ^_CMAX. For example, the first wireless device may determine ^_CMAX (e.g., further) based on one or more capabilities of the first wireless device, e.g., determine a value between two of value(s) according to the capability of the first wireless device. [0453] For example, ^_MAX,(ÏV is a second transmission power limit. For example, the first wireless device may receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value (e.g., sl-MaxTxPower) of (or a value indicating) ^_MAX,(ÏV. For example, the first wireless device may determine ^_MAX,(ÏV by a value of sl-MaxTxPower based on a priority level of the PSSCH transmission and a CBR range. The CBR range may comprise a CBR measured in slot ^ − | (e.g., N is the congestion control processing time). For example, if the first wireless device does not receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value (e.g., sl-MaxTxPower) of (or a value indicating) ^_MAX,(ÏV, the first wireless device may determine ^_MAX,(ÏV as ^_MAX,(ÏV = ^_CMAX. ^{[0454] The first wireless device may determine ^PSSCH,¡(^) as ^PSSCH,¡(^) = ^O,¡ +} 1_{0 ^!Ñ^^}

_{⋅ ^$¡ [dBm], e.g., if the first wireless device receives, from} a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) dl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH. For example, ^_O,¡ may be the value of dl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH in the one or more messages that the first wireless device receives, from a base station and/or another wireless device. The first wireless device may determine

_(ÏV8 [dBm], e.g., if the first wireless device does not receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) dl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH. For example, Ø_¡ may be a value of dl-Alpha- PSSCH-PSCCH, e.g., if the first wireless device receives, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) dl-Alpha-PSSCH-PSCCH. For example, the first wireless device may determine Ø_¡ as a predefined value (e.g., Ø_¡ = 1), e.g., if the first wireless device does not receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) dl-Alpha- PSSCH-PSCCH. The first wireless device may determine ^$_¡ as ^$_¡ = ^$_^,Ú,^(¤_^), e.g., if the active SL BWP is on a serving cell T. For example, ^$_¡ is a pathloss measurement value. For example, the first wireless device may determine ^$_¡ as ^$_¡ = reference signal power – higher layer filtered RSRP. For example,

the active SL BWP is on a serving cell T. For example, ^$_^,Ú,^(¤_^) may be a downlink pathloss estimate in dB calculated by the first wireless device using reference signal (RS) index ¤_^ of a RS resource for the active DL BWP of carrier Î of serving cell T. For example, the RS resource may be the one the first wireless device uses for determining a power of a PSSCH transmission scheduled by a DCI format 0_0 in serving cell T when the first wireless device is configured to monitor PDCCH for detection of DCI format 0_0 in serving cell T. For example, the RS resource may be the one corresponding to the SS/PBCH block the first wireless device uses to obtain MIB when the first wireless device is not configured to monitor PDCCH for detection of DCI format 0_0 in serving cell T. ^{[0455] The first wireless device determine ^PSSCH,=>(^) as ^PSSCH,=>(^) = ^O,=> +} 1_{0 ^!Ñ^^ ⋅ HPSSCH} _{RB (^)^ + Ø=> ⋅ ^$=> [dBm], e.g., if the first wireless device may receive,} from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) ^_O,=> (e.g., sl-P0- PSSCH-PSCCH), and/or if a SCI format scheduling the PSSCH transmission comprises a cast type indicator field indicating unicast or is SCI format 2-C. The first wireless device determine

the first wireless device does not receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) ^_O,=> (e.g., sl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH), and/or if a SCI format scheduling the PSSCH transmission does not comprise a cast type indicator field indicating unicast or is not SCI format 2-C. [0456] For example, the first wireless device may receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value o^{f (e.g., a value indicating) sl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH. The first wireless device may determine} ^_{O,=> as the value sl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH. For example, the first wireless device may receive,} from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) sl-Alpha-PSSCH- PSCCH. The first wireless device may determine Ø_=> as the value of sl-Alpha-PSSCH- PSCCH. The first wireless device may determine Ø_=> as a predefined value (e.g., Ø_=> = 1), e.g., if the first wireless device does not receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) sl-Alpha-PSSCH-PSCCH. ^$_=> may be a pathloss measurement value, e.g., that the first wireless device determined based on a PSSCH DM-RS. For example, the f^{irst wireless device may determine ^$=> as ^$=> =} ^_{Î^ ^^T^Q^Ñ^^^^!Û^ – ℎ^Ñℎ^ ^^Ü^ Î^^<^ ^U @Q@^. The first wireless device may} determine ^Î^ ^^T^Q^Ñ^^^^!Û^ from a PSSCH transmit power per RE summed over the antenna ports of the UE, higher layer filtered across PSSCH transmission occasions using a filter configuration provided by sl-FilterCoefficient (e.g., in the one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) that the first wireless device receives, from a base station and/or another wireless device). The ℎ^Ñℎ^ ^^Ü^ Î^^<^ ^U @Q@^ may be a RSRP that is reported to the first wireless device from a second wireless device receiving the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission and may be obtained from a PSSCH DM-RS using a filter configuration provided by sl-FilterCoefficient. [0457] For example, ^_SLRS1a may be a transmission power of SL RS(s) (e.g., the second transmission power of SL RS(s) transmission) via the SL RS transmission occasion i (e.g., in FIG.33A). For example,

[dBm]. [0458] ^_O,=>W= may be a value of a parameter (e.g., indicating a target power received/measured by the second wireless device) that the first wireless device receives from a^{base station and/or from another wireless device (e.g., via SIB and/or RRC message). If} ^_{O,=>W= is not provided, the first wireless device may use ^O,^ or ^O,=> instead of ^O,=>W=, e.g.,} _{^O,=>W= is replaced by ^O,^ or ^O,Á^ in the formular.} [0459] In an example, the first wireless device may have a plurality of values for ^_O,=>W=. The first wireless device may receive, from a base station and/or Syncref UE, a first message (e.g., sidelink broadcasting message, e.g., SIB) comprising at least one of the plurality of values. The first wireless device may receive, from another wireless device (e.g., the second wireless device), a second message (e.g., sidelink RRC message) comprising at least one of the plurality of values. The first wireless device may transmit, to another wireless device (e.g., the second wireless device), a third message (e.g., sidelink RRC message) comprising at least one of the plurality of values. The first wireless device may selective determine one of the plurality of values as ^_O,=>W=. [0460] For example, the first wireless device may select (determine) a first value, of the plurality of values as ^_O,=>W=, in the first message (e.g., sidelink broadcasting message, e.g., SIB), e.g., if the transmission of SL RS(s) occurs before PC5 unicast link is established between the first wireless device and the second wireless device (e.g., before transmitting to the second wireless device a direct link establishment request message or ProSe direct link establishment request message and/or before receiving from the second wireless device a direct link establishment response message or ProSe direct link establishment response message), if the transmission of SL RS(s) is for a particular sidelink beam management procedure (e.g., a (initial) beam pairing procedure, a beam management (or maintenance) procedure, and/or a beam failure detection/recovery procedure), and/or if the transmission of SL RS(s) is associated with a particular cast type (e.g., a cast type field in 1^st stage SCI and/or 2^nd stage SCI transmitted with the SL RS(s) in the same slot indicates the particular cast type). The particular cast type may be at least one of unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast. [0461] For example, the first wireless device may select (determine) a second value, of the plurality of values as ^_O,=>W=, in the second message (e.g., sidelink broadcasting message, e.g., SIB), e.g., if the transmission of SL RS(s) occurs after PC5 unicast link is established between the first wireless device and the second wireless device (e.g., after transmitting to the second wireless device a direct link establishment request message or ProSe direct link establishment request message and/or after receiving from the second wireless device a direct link establishment response message or ProSe direct link establishment response message), if the transmission of SL RS(s) is for a particular sidelink beam management procedure (e.g., a (initial) beam pairing procedure, a beam management (or maintenance) procedure, and/or a beam failure detection/recovery procedure), and/or if the transmission of SL RS(s) is associated with a particular cast type (e.g., a cast type field in 1^st stage SCI and/or 2^nd stage SCI transmitted with the SL RS(s) in the same slot indicates the particular cast type). The particular cast type may be at least one of unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast. [0462] For example, the first wireless device may select (determine) a second value, of the plurality of values as ^_O,=>W=, in the third message (e.g., sidelink broadcasting message, e.g., SIB), e.g., if the transmission of SL RS(s) occurs after PC5 unicast link is established between the first wireless device and the second wireless device (e.g., after transmitting to the second wireless device a direct link establishment request message or ProSe direct link establishment request message and/or after receiving from the second wireless device a direct link establishment response message or ProSe direct link establishment response message), if the transmission of SL RS(s) is for a particular sidelink beam management procedure (e.g., a (initial) beam pairing procedure, a beam management (or maintenance) procedure, and/or a beam failure detection/recovery procedure), and/or if the transmission of SL RS(s) is associated with a particular cast type (e.g., a cast type field in 1^st stage SCI and/or 2^nd stage SCI transmitted with the SL RS(s) in the same slot indicates the particular cast type). The particular cast type may be at least one of unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast. [0463]

be a number of resource blocks for the SL RS transmission occasion ^ and Ý may be a SCS configuration. Ø_=>W= may be a value of parameter that the first wireless device receives from a base station and/or from another wireless device (e.g., via SIB and/or RRC message). If Ø_=>W= is not provided, the first wireless device may use Ø_¡ (e.g., if provided) or Ø_=> (e.g., if Ø_¡ is not provided and/or if Ø_=> is provided). Ø_=>W= = 1, e.g., if none of Ø_¡, Ø_=>, and/or Ø_=>W= is provided. [0464] ^$_=>W= may be ^$_=>W= = ^$_¡ (e.g., ^$_^,Ú,^(¤_^)), e.g., if the transmission of SL RS(s) occurs before PC5 unicast link is established between the first wireless device and the second wireless device (e.g., before transmitting to the second wireless device a direct link establishment request message or ProSe direct link establishment request message and/or before receiving from the second wireless device a direct link establishment response message or ProSe direct link establishment response message), if the transmission of SL RS(s) is for a particular sidelink beam management procedure (e.g., a (initial) beam pairing procedure, a beam management (or maintenance) procedure, and/or a beam failure detection/recovery procedure), and/or if the transmission of SL RS(s) is associated with a particular cast type (e.g., a cast type field in 1^st stage SCI and/or 2^nd stage SCI transmitted with the SL RS(s) in the same slot indicates the particular cast type). The particular cast type may be at least one of unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast. [0465] ^$_=>W= may be ^$_=>W= = ^$_=>, e.g., if the transmission of SL RS(s) occurs after PC5 unicast link is established between the first wireless device and the second wireless device (e.g., after transmitting to the second wireless device a direct link establishment request message or ProSe direct link establishment request message and/or after receiving from the second wireless device a direct link establishment response message or ProSe direct link establishment response message), if the transmission of SL RS(s) is for a particular sidelink beam management procedure (e.g., a (initial) beam pairing procedure, a beam management (or maintenance) procedure, and/or a beam failure detection/recovery procedure), and/or if the transmission of SL RS(s) is associated with a particular cast type (e.g., a cast type field in 1^st stage SCI and/or 2^nd stage SCI transmitted with the SL RS(s) in the same slot indicates the particular cast type). The particular cast type may be at least one of unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast. ^{[0466] The first wireless device may determine ^$=>W= as ^$=>W= =} ^_{Î^ ^^T^Q^Ñ^^^^!Û^ 2 – ℎ^Ñℎ^ ^^Ü^ Î^^<^ ^U @Q@^2. The first wireless device may} determine ^Î^ ^^T^Q^Ñ^^^^!Û^ 2 from a SL RS transmit power (e.g., transmission power of SL RS(s)) per RE summed over the antenna ports of the first wireless device, filtered across SL RS transmission occasions using a filter configuration provided by sl- FilterCoefficient (e.g., in the one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) that the first wireless device receives, from a base station and/or another wireless device). For example, a SL RS index associated with [0467] ^$_=>W= may be a pathloss estimate calculated using (and/or being associated with) a particular SL RS (e.g., previously transmitted by the first wireless device and/or configured/indicated by the first wireless device). For example, an identifier (or index) of the particular SL RS may be the same as an identifier (or index) of an SL RS that the wireless device (determines to transmit) transmits via SL RS transmission occasion i using ^_SLRS1a(^). For example, an identifier (or index) of configuration comprising configuration parameter(s) of the particular SL RS may be the same as an identifier (or index) of configuration comprising configuration parameter(s) of an SL RS that the wireless device (determines to t^{ransmit) transmits via SL RS transmission occasion i using ^SLRS1a(^). For example,} ^{^Î^ ^^T^Q^Ñ^^^^!Û^ 2 may be an SL RS transmit power of the particular SL RS.} ℎ_{^Ñℎ^ ^^Ü^ Î^^<^ ^U @Q@^2 may be a RSRP that is reported to the first wireless device} from a second wireless device receiving one or more SL RSs comprising the particular SL RS and/or may be obtained from a one or more SL RSs comprising the particular SL RS using a filter configuration provided by sl-FilterCoefficient. ^{[0468] In an example, e.g., for the case of FIG. 33B, the wireless device may determine} ^_{TX1(^) = ^^^ ~^CMAX, ^MAX,(ÏV, ^^C(^TX1b(^), ^SLRS1b(^))^ [dBm]. For example, ^TX1b(^)} may comprise (e.g., be) a sum of a first transmission power ^_TX1b-PSSCH(^) for PSSCH in the P^{SCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion (e.g., in FIG. 33B) and a second transmission power} ^_{TX1b-PSCCH(^) for PSCCH in the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion (e.g., in FIG. 33B).} The first wireless device may determine ^_SLRS1b(^) as ^_SLRS1b(^) = ^_SLRS1a(^). ^{[0469] For example, the wireless device may determine ^TX1b-PSSCH(^) as ^TX1b-PSSCH(^) =} ^_{^^4^PSSCH,¡^^(^), ^PSSCH,=>^^(^)8. For example, the first wireless device may determine}

e^{xample, the first wireless device may determine ^PSSCH,Á^^'(^) as ^PSSCH,=>^^(^) = ^O,=> +} 1_{0 ^!Ñ^^ ~2{ ⋅ HPSSCH1b} _{RB (^)^ + Ø=> ⋅ ^$ PSSCH1b} _{=> [dBm]. For example, HRB (^) may be a} number of resource blocks for the corresponding PSSCH transmission in PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^. ^{[0470] For example, the wireless device may determine ^TX1b-PSSCH as ^TX1b-PSSCH =} ^_{PSSCH,¡^^(^), e.g., if the first wireless device receives, from a base station and/or another} wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) ^_O,¡ (e.g., dl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH), if the first wireless device may not receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) ^_O,=>, and/or if a SCI format scheduling the PSSCH transmission does not comprise a cast type indicator field indicating unicast or is SCI format 2-C. ^{[0471] For example, the wireless device may determine ^TX1b-PSSCH as ^TX1b-PSSCH =} ^_{PSSCH,=>^^(^), e.g., if the first wireless device does not receive, from a base station and/or} another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) ^_O,¡ (e.g., dl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH), if the first wireless device may receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) ^_O,=>, and/or if a SCI format scheduling the PSSCH transmission comprises a cast type indicator field indicating unicast or is SCI format 2-C. [0472] For example, ^_TX1b-PSCCH may be a transmission power of PSCCH used for PSCCH t^{ransmission via the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion i (e.g., in FIG. 33B). For example,}

may be a value of a parameter that the first wireless device receives from a base station and/or from another wireless device (e.g., via SIB and/or RRC message). If ^_O,[=^^^ is not provided, t^{he first wireless device may use ^O,^ or ^O,=> instead of ^O,=>W=, e.g., ^O,[=^^^ is replaced by} ^_{O,^ or ^O,Á^ in the formular. H[=^^^} _{RB (^) may be a number of resource blocks for the} c^{orresponding PSCCH transmission in PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^. Ø[=^^^ may} b_{e a value of parameter that the first wireless device receives from a base station and/or} from another wireless device (e.g., via SIB and/or RRC message). If Ø_[=^^^ is not provided, the first wireless device may use Ø_¡ (e.,g., if provided) or Ø_=> (e.g., if Ø_¡ is not provided a^{nd/or if Ø=> is provided). Ø[=^^^ = 1, e.g., if none of Ø¡, Ø=>, and/or Ø[=^^^ is provided.} ^_{$[=^^^ may be ^$[=^^^ = ^$¡. ^$[=^^^ may be ^$[=^^^ = ^$=>.} [0473] The first wireless device may split the power ^_TX1b-PSSCH, e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the PSSCH with non-zero power in the PSCCH- PSSCH transmission occasion (e.g., in FIG.33B). The first wireless device may split the power ^_TX1b-PSCCH, e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the PSCCH with non-zero power in the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion (e.g., in FIG. 33B). The first wireless device may split the power ^_SLRS1b, e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the SL RS(s) with non-zero power in the SL RS transmission occasion (e.g., in FIG.33B). ^{[0474] In an example, e.g., for the case of FIG. 33C, the wireless device may determine} ^_{TX1(^) = ^^^ ~^CMAX, ^MAX,(ÏV, ^^C(^TX1c, ^SLRS1c)^ [dBm]. For example, ^TX1c may} comprise (e.g., be) a transmission power ^_TX1c-PSCCH for PSCCH in the PSCCH transmission o^{ccasion (e.g., in FIG. 33C). The first wireless device may determine ^} _SLRS1c ^{as ^} _SLRS1c ⁼ ^_SLRS1a. [0475] For example, ^_TX1b-PSCCH may be a transmission power of PSCCH used for PSCCH t^{ransmission via the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion i (e.g., in FIG. 33B). For example,}

may be a value of a parameter that the first wireless device receives from a base station and/or from another wireless device (e.g., via SIB and/or RRC message). If ^_O,[=^^^ is not provided, t^{he first wireless device may use ^O,Á^VÁ instead of ^O,[=^^^, e.g., ^O,[=^^^ is replaced by} ^_{O,Á^VÁ in the formular. H[=^^^} _{RB (^) may be a number of resource blocks for the corresponding} PSCCH transmission in PSCCH transmission occasion ^. If Ø_[=^^^ is not provided, the first w^{ireless device may use Ø=>W= (e.g., if provided) Ø[=^^^ = 1, e.g., if none of Ø[=^^^ and/or} Ø_{=>W= is provided. ^$[=^^^ may be ^$[=^^^ = ^$¡. ^$[=^^^ may be ^$[=^^^ = ^$=>.} [0476] The first wireless device may split the power ^_TX1c-PSCCH, e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the PSCCH with non-zero power in the PSCCH t^{ransmission occasion (e.g., in FIG. 33C). The first wireless device may split the power} ^_{SLRS1c, e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the SL RS(s) with} non-zero power in the SL RS transmission occasion (e.g., in FIG.33C). [0477] In second example embodiments, a first wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) in a same slot may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) a first transmission power of the PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) and a second transmission power of the SL RS(s). For example, the first wireless device may determine the first transmission power based on a number of resource blocks for the transmission of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH). For example, the wireless device may determine the second transmission power based on a number of resource blocks for the transmission of SL RS(s). The wireless device may further determine a third transmission power to be used for the transmission of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) and/or SL RS(s), e.g., for all the transmission occasions in the same slot with the same transmission power. [0478] For example, the third transmission power is a smaller transmission power of the first transmission power and the second transmission power. This may be a case of power reduction (e.g., to reduce an interference) for a transmission having a larger transmission power among the first transmission and the second transmission. For example, the first wireless device may determine the third transmission power used for a SL RS(s) transmission on a resource pool in symbols where a PSCCH and/or PSSCH are not transmitted in (e.g., are not multiplexed in frequency) SL RS transmission occasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier Î as

[0479] For example, (e.g., for the case of FIG.33A), the first wireless device may transmit SL RS(s) with the third transmission power ^_TX2(^) via SL RS transmission occasion i in a slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34) and/or transmit PSSCH with the third transmission power ^_TX2(^) via PSSCH transmission occasion i in the slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34). The first wireless device may split the power ^_PSSCH(^), e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE t^{ransmits the PSSCH with non-zero power. The first wireless device may determine a power} ^_{PSSCH2(^) for a PSSCH transmission on a resource pool in the symbols in the slot (e.g., slot n} in FIG.34) where a corresponding PSCCH is transmitted in PSCCH-PSSCH transmission o^{ccasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier Î as ^ÄÁÁ()}

⁺ ^_{TX2(^) [dBm]. For example,}

_{may be a number of resource blocks for the} c^{orresponding PSSCH transmission in PSSCH transmission occasion ^. For example,}

_{may be a number of resource blocks for the corresponding PSCCH transmission in} P^{SCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^. The first wireless device may split the power} ^_{ÄÁÁ()1(^), e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the PSSCH with} non-zero power. The first wireless device may determine a power ^_ÄÁ(()(^) used for transmitting PSCCH of a PSCCH transmission on a resource pool in PSCCH-PSSCH t^{ransmission occasion ^ in the slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34) as ^ÄÁ(()(^) =} 1_{0 ^!Ñ^^}

_{+ ^TX2(^)[dBm]. For example, the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission} occasion ^ may comprise a symbol in which the first wireless device transmits a PSCCH and/or a PSSCH. The first wireless device may determine ^_ÄÁÁ()(^) based on example embodiment(s) in the present disclosure. ^{[0480] In an example, e.g., for the case of FIG. 33B, the wireless device may determine}

_{example, ^TX1b may comprise} (e.g., be) a sum of a first transmission power ^_TX1b-PSSCH for PSSCH in the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion (e.g., in FIG.33B) and a second transmission power ^_TX1b-PSCCH for PSCCH in the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion (e.g., in FIG.33B). The first wireless device may determine ^_SLRS1b as ^_SLRS1b = ^_SLRS1a. ^{[0481] In an example, e.g., for the case of FIG. 33C, the wireless device may determine}

_{example, ^TX1c may comprise} (e.g., be) a transmission power ^_TX1c-PSCCH for PSCCH in the PSCCH transmission occasion (e.g., in FIG.33C). The first wireless device may determine ^_SLRS1c as ^_SLRS1c = ^_SLRS1a. [0482] In third example embodiments, a first wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) in a same slot may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) a second transmission power of the SL RS(s). The first wireless device may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) a first transmission power of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) based on the second transmission power. The first wireless device may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) the first transmission power of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) to being as the same as the second transmission power. [0483] For example, the first wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) in a same slot may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) the second transmission power of the SL RS(s) firstly. For example, the first wireless device may determine the second transmission power used for a SL RS(s) transmission on a resource pool in symbols where a PSCCH and/or PSSCH are not transmitted in (e.g., are not multiplexed in frequency) SL RS(s) transmission occasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier Î as ^_TX3(^) = ^^^4^_CMAX, ^_MAX,(ÏV, ^_SLRS1a8 [dBm]. For example, the first wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) in a same slot may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) the first transmission power of the PSCCH and/or PSSCH as ^_TX3(^) after or in response to determining the second transmission power. [0484] For example, (e.g., for the case of FIG.33A), the first wireless device may transmit SL RS(s) with the second transmission power ^_TX3(^) via SL RS transmission occasion i in a s^{lot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34) and/or transmit PSSCH with the second transmission power} ^_{TX3(^) via PSSCH transmission occasion i in the slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34). The first} wireless device may split the power ^_PSSCH(^), e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the PSSCH with non-zero power. The first wireless device may determine a power ^_PSSCH2(^) for a PSSCH transmission on a resource pool in the symbols in the slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34) where a corresponding PSCCH is transmitted in PSCCH- P^{SSCH transmission occasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier Î as ^ÄÁÁ()1(^) =} 1_{0 ^!Ñ ~¢ÔÕÕÖ×} _{ÒÓ (5)y¢ÔÕÖÖ×} _{ÒÓ (5)} _{^ + ^ (^) [dBm]. For examp PSSCH} _{^^ ¢ÔÕÕÖ×} _{ÒÓ (5) TX3 le, HRB (^) may be a number} of resource blocks for the corresponding PSSCH transmission in PSSCH transmission occasion ^. For example,

(^) may be a number of resource blocks for corresponding PSCCH transmission in PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^. The first wireless device may split the power ^_ÄÁÁ()1(^), e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the PSSCH with non-zero power. The first wireless device may determine a power ^_ÄÁ(()(^) used for transmitting PSCCH of a PSCCH transmission on a resource pool in PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^ in the slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34) as example, the PSCCH-PSSCH

transmission occasion ^ may comprise a symbol in which the first wireless device transmits a PSCCH and/or a PSSCH. The first wireless device may determine ^_ÄÁÁ()(^) based on example embodiment(s) in the present disclosure. [0485] In an example, e.g., for the case of FIG.33B, the first wireless device may transmit SL RS(s) with the second transmission power ^_TX3(^) via SL RS transmission occasion i in a slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34). The first wireless device may determine a power ^_PSSCH2(^) for a PSSCH transmission on a resource pool in the symbols in the slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34) where a corresponding PSCCH is transmitted in PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier

[dBm]. For example,

(^) may be a number of resource blocks for the PSSCH transmission in PSSCH transmission occasion ^. For example,

(^) may be number of resource blocks for the corresponding PSCCH transmission in PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^. The first wireless device may split the power ^_ÄÁÁ()1(^), e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the PSSCH with non-zero power. The first wireless device may determine a power ^_ÄÁ(()(^) used for transmitting PSCCH of a PSCCH transmission on a resource pool in PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^ in the slot (e.g., slot

the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^ may comprise a symbol in which the first w^{ireless device transmits a PSCCH and/or a PSSCH. The first wireless device may determine} ^_{ÄÁÁ()(^) based on example embodiment(s) in the present disclosure.} [0486] In an example, e.g., for the case of FIG.33C, the first wireless device may transmit SL RS(s) with the second transmission power ^_TX3(^) via SL RS transmission occasion i in a slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34). The first wireless device may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) the first transmission power of PSCCH as ^_TX3(^). The first wireless device may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) the first transmission power of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) to being as the same as the second transmission power. [0487] In an example, e.g., for the case of FIG.33D, the first wireless device may transmit SL RS(s) with the second transmission power ^_TX3(^) via SL RS transmission occasion i in a slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34). The first wireless device may determine a power ^_SLRS2(^) for a SL RS(s) transmission on a resource pool in the symbols in the slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34) where a corresponding PSCCH is transmitted in PSCCH-SL RS transmission occasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier

For example,

may be a number of resource blocks for the SL RS occasion ^. For example,

(^) may be a number of resource blocks for corresponding PSCCH transmission in PSCCH-SL RS transmission occasion ^. The first wireless device may split the power ^_Á^VÁ1(^), e.g., equally, across the antenna ports on which the UE transmits the SL RS with non-zero power. The first wireless device may determine a power ^_ÄÁ(()(^) used for transmitting PSCCH of a PSCCH transmission on a resource pool i^{n PSCCH-PSSCH transmission occasion ^ in the slot (e.g., slot n in FIG.34) as ^ÄÁ(()(^) =} 1_{0 ^!Ñ^^ ~} ^¢ÔÕÖÖ× ^{ÒÓ (5)} ¢_ÕãÒÕ _{ÒÓ (5) ^ + ^TX3(^)[dBm]. For example, the PSCCH-SL RS transmission occasion} _{^ may comprise a symbol in which the first wireless device transmits a PSCCH.} [0488] In fourth example embodiments, a first wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) in a same slot may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) a first transmission power of the PSCCH (and/or PSSCH). The first wireless device may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) a second transmission power of SL RS(s) based on the first transmission power. The first wireless device may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) the second transmission power of SL RS(s) being as the same as the first transmission power of PSCCH (and/or PSSCH). [0489] For example, the first wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) in a same slot may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) the first transmission power of the PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) firstly. For example, the first wireless device may determine the first transmission power used for a PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) transmission on a resource pool in symbols where a PSCCH and/or PSSCH are not transmitted in (e.g., are not multiplexed in frequency) SL RS(s) transmission occasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier Î as For example, the first wireless device that transmits PSCCH (and/or PSSCH) with SL RS(s) in a same slot may determine (e.g., adjust, use, change) the second transmission power of the SL RS(s) as ^_TX4(^) after or in response to determining the second transmission power. [0490] For example, (e.g., for the case of FIG.33C), ^_PSCH may be a transmission power of PSCCH (e.g., the first transmission power). For example, the first wireless device may determine ^_PSCH used for a PSCCH transmission on a resource pool in symbols of PSCCH t^{ransmission occasion ^ on active SL BWP ^ of carrier Î as ^PSCH(^) =} ^_{^^4^PSCCH,¡(^), ^PSCCH,=>(^)8. ^PSCCH,¡(^) and ^PSCCH,=>(^) may be transmission powers} determined by the first wireless device for PSCCH transmission via the PSCCH transmission occasion i (e.g., in FIG.33C). ^{[0491] The first wireless device may determine ^PSCCH,¡(^) as ^PSCCH,¡(^) = ^O,¡ +} 1_{0 ^!Ñ^^}

_{+ Ø¡ ⋅ ^$¡ [dBm], e.g., if the first wireless device receives, from} a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) dl-P0-PSCH-PSCCH. For example, ^_O,¡ may be the value of dl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH in the one or more messages that the first wireless device receives, from a base station and/or another wireless device. The first wireless device may determine

[dBm], e.g., if the first wireless device does not receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) dl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH. For example, Ø_¡ may be a value of dl-Alpha- PSSCH-PSCCH, e.g., if the first wireless device receives, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) dl-Alpha-PSSCH-PSCCH. For example, the first wireless device may determine Ø_¡ as a predefined value (e.g., Ø_¡ = 1), e.g., if the first wireless device does not receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) dl-Alpha- PSSCH-PSCCH. The first wireless device may determine ^$_¡ as ^$_¡ = ^$_^,Ú,^(¤_^), e.g., if the active SL BWP is on a serving cell T. For example, ^$_¡ is a pathloss measurement value. For example, the first wireless device may determine ^$_¡ as ^$_¡ = reference signal power – higher layer filtered RSRP. For example, ^$ = ^$_^,Ú,^(¤_^), e.g., if the active SL BWP is on a serving cell T. For example, ^$_^,Ú,^(¤_^) may be a downlink pathloss estimate in dB calculated by the first wireless device using reference signal (RS) index ¤_^ of a RS resource for the active DL BWP of carrier Î of serving cell T. For example, the RS resource may be the one the first wireless device uses for determining a power of a PSSCH transmission scheduled by a DCI format 0_0 in serving cell T when the first wireless device is configured to monitor PDCCH for detection of DCI format 0_0 in serving cell T. For example, the RS resource may be the one corresponding to the SS/PBCH block the first wireless device uses to obtain MIB when the first wireless device is not configured to monitor PDCCH for detection of DCI format 0_0 in serving cell T. ^{[0492] The first wireless device determine ^PSCCH,=>(^) as ^PSCCH,=>(^) = ^O,=> +} 1_{0 ^!Ñ^^}

_{+ Ø=> ⋅ ^$=> [dBm], e.g., if the first wireless device may receive,} from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) ^_O,=> (e.g., sl-P0- PSSCH-PSCCH), and/or if a SCI format scheduling the SL RS transmission comprises a cast type indicator field indicating unicast or is SCI format 2-C. The first wireless device determine

the first wireless device does not receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) ^_O,=> (e.g., sl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH), and/or if a SCI format scheduling the SL RS transmission does not comprise a cast type indicator field indicating unicast or is not SCI format 2-C. [0493] For example, the first wireless device may receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value o^{f (e.g., a value indicating) sl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH. The first wireless device may determine} ^_{O,=> as the value sl-P0-PSSCH-PSCCH. For example, the first wireless device may receive,} from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) sl-Alpha-PSSCH- PSCCH. The first wireless device may determine Ø_=> as the value of sl-Alpha-PSSCH- PSCCH. The first wireless device may determine Ø_=> as a predefined value (e.g., Ø_=> = 1), e.g., if the first wireless device does not receive, from a base station and/or another wireless device, one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) comprising a value of (e.g., a value indicating) sl-Alpha-PSSCH-PSCCH. ^$_=> may be a pathloss measurement value, e.g., that the first wireless device determined based on a PSSCH DM-RS and/or PSCCH DM- R^{S. For example, the first wireless device may determine ^$=> as ^$=> =} ^_{Î^ ^^T^Q^Ñ^^^^!Û^ – ℎ^Ñℎ^ ^^Ü^ Î^^<^ ^U @Q@^. The first wireless device may} determine ^Î^ ^^T^Q^Ñ^^^^!Û^ from a PSSCH transmit power (and/or PSCCH transmit power) per RE summed over the antenna ports of the UE, higher layer filtered across PSSCH (and/or PSCCH) transmission occasions using a filter configuration provided by sl- FilterCoefficient (e.g., in the one or more messages (e.g., RRC message(s) and/or SIB) that t^{he first wireless device receives, from a base station and/or another wireless device). The} ℎ_{^Ñℎ^ ^^Ü^ Î^^<^ ^U @Q@^ may be a RSRP that is reported to the first wireless device} from a second wireless device receiving the PSCCH-PSSCH transmission and may be obtained from a PSSCH DM-RS (and/or PSCCH DM-RS) using a filter configuration provided by sl-FilterCoefficient. [0494] FIG.35 illustrates an example of a power control as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG.35 shows a result of power control disclosed (e.g., at least a part as an example of at least one of example embodiments) in the presence disclosure. FIG. 35 compares the power determined based on the present disclosure (e.g., solid line with power for PSCCH, PSSCH, and/or SL RS(s) in slot n in FIG.35) and the power determined based on the existing technologies (e.g., dotted line with Existing technologies in FIG.35) which shown in FIG.34. As shown in FIG.35, a signal strength (or transmission power of a first wireless device) during slot n is static (e.g., maintained/kept as the same or constant) and varies dynamically across different slots (e.g., different and/or adjacent slots) [0495] In fifth example embodiments of the present disclosure, a first wireless device may determine a power offset between a first transmission power of the PSCCH and/or PSSCH transmission(s) and a second transmission power of SL RS transmission. The first wireless device may determine the first transmission power and the second transmission power such that a power difference between the first transmission power and the second transmission power is based on the power offset. For example, the first wireless device may determine the first transmission power and the second transmission power such that a power difference between the first transmission power and the second transmission power is the power offset. [0496] The power offset may be a value in a power offset range (e.g., from value X to value Y). The power offset may be an integer value. The power offset may be in a unit of dB. The power offset may be in a unit of watt [W] and/or milliwatt [mW]. For example, the power offset may be a positive integer value (e.g., for power boosting). For example, the power offset may be a negative integer value (e.g., for power reduction). [0497] For example, the first wireless device may firstly determine the first transmission power and determine the second transmission power based on the determined first transmission power and the power offset. For example, the second transmission power is higher than or equal to the sum of the first transmission power and the power offset. For example, the second transmission power is lower than or equal to the sum of the first transmission power and the power offset. [0498] The first wireless device may determine the power offset as a predefined value. The first wireless device may receive the power offset from a base station. For example, a message (RRC message and/or SIB) that the first wireless device receives from the base station may comprise the power offset. The first wireless device may transmit the power offset to the second wireless device, e.g., before transmitting the SL RS(s). [0499] FIG.36 illustrates an example of power offset as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. For example, the first wireless device may determine the power offset based on capability information of the second wireless device (e.g., Option 1 in FIG.36). For example, the first wireless device may receive, from the second wireless device, a capability information message comprising one or more parameters indicating the capability of the second wireless device. The one or more parameters may indicate whether the second wireless device is capable of handling the power transition within a slot, how much power transition within the slot the second wireless device is capable of handling, and/or one or more power offset values recommended by the second wireless device. The first wireless device may determine the power offset based on the one or more parameters. For example, the first wireless device may determine not to use the power offset, e.g., if the one or more parameters indicates that the second wireless device is not capable of handling the power transition within a slot. In this case, the first wireless device may determine the first transmission power and/or the second transmission power according to the example embodiments in the present disclosure. For example, the first wireless device may determine the power offset, e.g., if the one or more parameters indicates that the second wireless device is capable of handling the power transition within a slot. For example, the first wireless device may determine a particular power offset among one or more power offsets, e.g., if the one or more parameters indicates that the second wireless device is capable of handling the power transition within a slot, if the one or more parameters indicates the one or more power offsets and/or a range of power offset that comprise the one or more power offsets. The first wireless device may transmit the determined power offset to the second wireless device. For example, the first wireless device may determine the power offset in a broadcast message or a message received from a base station (e.g., Option 2 in FIG.36). In this case, the second wireless device may receive the same power offset, as the one the first wireless device received, that is in the broadcast message or the message received from the base station. The first wireless device may determine, using the determined power offset according to example embodiment(s) of the present disclosure, the first transmission power of the first transmission and the second transmission power of the second transmission. in this case there is a power transition (e.g., like FIG.34) due to the power boosting and/or power reduction corresponding to the power offset set. The second wireless device may, using the power offset, adapt (control, train, reconfigure) its AGC since the power offset (e.g., an amount of the power transition corresponding to the power offset) is known to the second wireless device. [0500] In example embodiment of the present disclosure, a power control for SL RS may be applicable to a SL RS transmission in a slot without PSCCH and PSCCH. For example, in a standalone scenario, e.g., FIG.32B, a first wireless device may transmit the SL RS without multiplexing any of PSCCH and PSSCH in a slot. In this case, the first wireless device may determine the power of the SL RS transmission may be ^_SLRS1a(^). [0501] In example embodiments of the present disclosure, the first wireless device may selectively determine which transmit power control to be used for the SL RS transmission. For example, the first wireless device may selectively determine to use, for the SL RS transmission, at least one of power controls disclosed as example embodiments of the present disclosure, e.g., if the transmission of SL RS(s) occurs before PC5 unicast link is established between the first wireless device and the second wireless device (e.g., before transmitting to the second wireless device a direct link establishment request message or ProSe direct link establishment request message and/or before receiving from the second wireless device a direct link establishment response message or ProSe direct link establishment response message), if the transmission of SL RS(s) is for a particular sidelink beam management procedure (e.g., a (initial) beam pairing procedure, a beam management (or maintenance) procedure, and/or a beam failure detection/recovery procedure), and/or if the transmission of SL RS(s) is associated with a particular cast type (e.g., a cast type field in 1^st stage SCI and/or 2^nd stage SCI transmitted with the SL RS(s) in the same slot indicates the particular cast type). The particular cast type may be at least one of unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast. [0502] For example, the first wireless device may selectively determine to use, for the SL RS transmission, at least one of power controls disclosed as example embodiments of the present disclosure, e.g., if the transmission of SL RS(s) occurs after PC5 unicast link is established between the first wireless device and the second wireless device (e.g., after transmitting to the second wireless device a direct link establishment request message or ProSe direct link establishment request message and/or after receiving from the second wireless device a direct link establishment response message or ProSe direct link establishment response message), if the transmission of SL RS(s) is for a particular sidelink beam management procedure (e.g., a (initial) beam pairing procedure, a beam management (or maintenance) procedure, and/or a beam failure detection/recovery procedure), and/or if the transmission of SL RS(s) is associated with a particular cast type (e.g., a cast type field in 1^st stage SCI and/or 2^nd stage SCI transmitted with the SL RS(s) in the same slot indicates the particular cast type). The particular cast type may be at least one of unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast. [0503] For example, the first wireless device may selectively determine that the transmission power of the first transmission for the SL RS is based on the second transmission power of the second transmission of the PSSCH via a PSSCH transmission occasion (e.g., FIG.29 or FIG. 33A), e.g., if the transmission of the SL RS is for CQI acquisition (e.g., FIG.29). For example, the first wireless device may transmit SL CSI-RS (e.g., SL RS and/or SL SSB) within a unicast PSSCH transmission if the following conditions hold: - CSI reporting is enabled by higher layer parameter sl-CSI-Acquisition; and - the 'CSI request' field in the corresponding SCI format 2-A or 2-C is set to 1. The first wireless device may transmit or receive following parameters for CSI-RS transmission for each CSI-RS configuration: - sl-CSI-RS-FirstSymbol indicates the first OFDM symbol in a PRB used for SL CSI- RS - sl-CSI-RS-FreqAllocation indicates the number of antenna ports and the frequency domain allocation for SL CSI-RS. When the first wireless is configured with Qp={1,2} CSI-RS port(s) in sidelink and the number of scheduled layers is ^_i ^[ q⁼ E⁼ ;^{^} ^^{^}, - The CSI-RS amplitude scaling factor ¹_(ÁÂVÁ specified in the present disclosure may the scaling factor for the

corresponding PSSCH specified in the present disclosure. [0504] In the present disclosure, an amplitude scaling factor may refer to a scaling or weighting factor multiplied to one or more complex-valued symbols (e.g., block of complex- valued symbols), e.g., in order to conform to a power (e.g., transmission power or transmit power) disclosed in example embodiment(s) of the present disclosure. The power may be at least one of ^_TX1(^), ^_TX2(^), and/or ^_TX3(^). [0505] For example, the first wireless device may determine an amplitude scaling factor for an each of transmissions. For example, an amplitude scaling factor may be associated with a particular transmission. [0506] In the example embodiments of the present disclosure, an amplitude scaling factor may be denoted by ¹. A transmission associated with an amplitude scaling factor may be denoted as superscript or subscript of ¹ in the example embodiments of the present disclosure. [0507] In the example embodiments of the present disclosure, the first wireless device may determine an amplitude scaling factor associated with a transmission of signal (e.g., SL RS, PSCCH, and/or PSSCH) as ¹ = ^(^(^))^{^} + T. For example, for ¹_(ÁÂVÁ, ^ = ¹_^ ^Ä Ã^ÁÁ V⁽ Á⁾ ∙ may be at least proportion

may be at least one of ^_TX1(^), ^_TX2(^), ^_TX3(^) and/or ^_TX4(^). [0508] For example, for each of the antenna ports used for transmission of the PSSCH, the block of complex-valued symbols

− 1) may be multiplied with the a^{mplitude scaling factor ¹PSSCH} ^{DMRS in order to conform to the transmit power (e.g., ^TX1(^),} ^_{TX2(^), and/or ^TX3(^)) specified in the present disclosure and/or mapped to resource} elements (^′, ^)_^,{ in the virtual resource blocks assigned for transmission, where ^³ = 0 is the first subcarrier in the lowest-numbered virtual resource block assigned for transmission. [0509] For example, for transmission of the PSCCH, the set of complex-valued modulation symbols U⁽0⁾, … , U(H_symb − 1) may be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor ¹_D ^PS M^C R^C S^H in order to conform to the transmit power (e.g., ^_TX1(^), ^_TX2(^), and/or ^_TX3(^)) specified in t^{he present disclosure and/or mapped in sequence starting with U(0) to resource elements} (_{^, ^)^,{ assigned for transmission, and not used for the demodulation reference signals} associated with PSCCH, in increasing order of first the index ^ over the assigned physical resources, and then the index ^ on antenna port ^ = 2000. The resource elements used for the PSCCH in the first OFDM symbol in the mapping operation above, including any DM-RS, PT-RS, or CSI-RS occurring in the first OFDM symbol, may be duplicated in the immediately preceding OFDM symbol. [0510] For example, a sequence ⁽^⁾ of the DMRS(s) for PSSCH may be mapped to the intermediate quantity

using configuration type 1 without transform precoding. The i^{ntermediate quantity ^ä(^äå,{)} ^{^,i may be precoded, multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor} ¹_PSSCH _{DMRS , and mapped to physical resources according to}

where - the precoding matrix ¶ may be predefined (e.g., identity matrix), - the set of antenna ports î^_^, … , ^_ïy^ð may be predefined, and - the set of antenna ports ^°^ä_^, … , ^ä_±y^ ^} be predefined; and the following conditions are fulfilled: - the resource elements ^ä^{(^äå,{)} ^_,i are within the common resource blocks allocated for PSSCH transmission. [0511] For example, the sequence _i(^) for demodulation reference signals for PSCCH may be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor ¹_^ ^Ä Ã^Á( V⁽ Á⁾ in order to conform to the transmit power (e.g., ^_TX1(^), ^_TX2(^), and/or ^_TX3(^)) specified in the present disclosure and/or m^{apped in sequence starting with i(0) to resource elements (^, ^)^,{ in a slot on antenna port} ^{^ = 2000 according to}

^_{3 = 0,1,2} _{^ = 0,1, …} where the following conditions may be fulfilled - they are within the resource elements constituting the PSCCH The quantity Û_f,5

is given by Table 8.4.1.3.2-1 and ^ ∈ ^°0,1,2^} may be randomly selected by the first wireless device. The reference point for ^ may be subcarrier 0 in common resource block 0. The quantity ^ may be the OFDM symbol number within the slot. [0512] In an example embodiment, a plurality of AGC symbols may be allocated in a slot where the first wireless device transmits the SL RS(s) with PSCCH (and/or PSSCH). For example, a first AGC symbol may be allocated to a first symbol, of a slot, with a symbol index 0, e.g., for a first sidelink transmission scheduled via one or more first symbols (e.g., adjacently located with the AGC symbol) in the slot after the first AGC symbol. The second wireless device may perform the AGC training using the power and/or signal received via the first symbol, for receiving the first transmission. For example, a second AGC symbol may be allocated to a second symbol after the first symbol in the slot. The second symbol may be a preceding symbol of one or more second symbols via which the first wireless device may transmit the SL RS(s) in the slot. The first wireless device may transmit, to the second wireless device, a signal (e.g., SCI) and/or a message comprising a parameter indicating the location of second symbol (or a symbol index of the second symbol) in the slot. The second wireless device may determine the location of the second symbol, indicated by the parameter, in the slot. The second wireless device may perform the AGC training using the power and/or signal received via the second symbol, for receiving the second transmission. [0513] Example embodiments may provide enhancement for a power control and/or for AGC training/control for transmission of SL RS(s) multiplexed with one or more different sidelink transmissions (e.g., PSCCH and/or PSSCH) in a same slot. The example embodiments keep the signal strength (e.g., transmit power or reception power) while transmitting SL RS(s) and the one or more different sidelink transmissions in a same slot. Thus, the receiving wireless device keep the accurate gain control of AGC that prevent its receiver from including large amount of unwanted (e.g., interference and/or noise) signal and/or from clipping a received signal (e.g., a received signal with a large power). As a result, example embodiments improve the decoding failure and/or signal distortion (e.g., information loss) occurred in the existing technologies. The example embodiments provides a mechanism that the receiving wireless device receives a power offset (pre-)configured (and/or predefined), corresponding to an amount of power transition within a slot. the receiving wireless device may use the received power offset to properly adapts its receiver’s gain to the change of transmission powers within the same slot, which prevents its receiver from including large amount of unwanted (e.g., interference and/or noise) signal and/or from clipping a received signal (e.g., a received signal with a large power). As a result, example embodiments improve the decoding failure and/or signal distortion (e.g., information loss) occurred in the existing technologies. [0514] FIG.37 illustrates an example flowchart of power control as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. At 3701, a first wireless device may receive one or more power control parameters for a sidelink reference signal transmission. At 3702, the first wireless device may transmit to a second wireless device and via a slot: one or more first sidelink reference signals using a first transmission power based on the one or more power control parameters; and a sidelink control channel using the second transmission power based on the first transmission power. For example, the transmitting the sidelink control channel using the second transmission power may be in response to the sidelink control channel and the one or more reference signals being scheduled in a same slot. For example, the first wireless device may determine the second transmission power based on the first transmission power. For example, the determined second transmission power may be same as the first transmission power. For example, the determined second transmission power is a scaled transmission power of the first transmission power. [0515] FIG.38 illustrates an example flowchart of power control as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. At 3801, the first wireless device may determine to transmit a sidelink control channel and one or more reference signals using a (e.g., same) transmission power in response to the sidelink control channel and the one or more reference signals in a (e.g., same) slot. At 3802, the first wireless device may transmit based on determining and via the same slot: the one or more first sidelink reference signals using the transmission power; and the sidelink control channel using the same transmission power. [0516] In an example embodiment of the present disclosure (e.g., referring at least any of FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, FIG.33D, FIG 35, and/or FIG.36), a first wireless device may receive one or more messages from a base station and/or one or more wireless devices. The one or more messages may comprise one or more open loop power control parameters for a sidelink reference signal transmission. The first wireless device may determine: a first transmission power, based on (or using) the one or more open loop power control parameters, for a transmission of one or more first sidelink reference signals in a slot; and a second transmission power, based on (or using) the first transmission power, for a transmission of sidelink control channel in the slot. The first wireless device may transmit to a second wireless device and via the slot: the one or more first sidelink reference signals using (or with) the first transmission power; and the sidelink control channel using (or with) the second transmission power. [0517] In an example embodiment of the present disclosure (e.g., referring at least any of FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, FIG.33D, FIG 35, and/or FIG.36), a first wireless device may receive one or more power control parameters for a sidelink reference signal transmission. The first wireless device may determine, for a transmission of one or more first sidelink reference signals, a first transmission power based on the one or more power control parameters. The first wireless device may transmit to a second wireless device via a slot:the one or more first sidelink reference signals using a first amplitude scaling factor; and a sidelink control channel using a second amplitude scaling factor. For example, the first amplitude scaling factor and the second first amplitude scaling factor are determined based on the first transmission power. [0518] In an example embodiment of the present disclosure (e.g., referring at least any of FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, FIG.33D, FIG 35, and/or FIG.36), a first wireless device may transmit, to a second wireless device via a slot: one or more first sidelink reference signals using a first amplitude scaling factor; and a sidelink control channel using a second amplitude scaling factor. For example, the first amplitude scaling factor and the second first amplitude scaling factor are based on a first transmission power determined for the one or more first sidelink reference signals. For example, the first wireless device may determine the amplitude scaling factor in order to conform to the first power. For example, the amplitude scaling factor is scaled by a number of antenna ports. For example, the amplitude scaling factor is scaled by a number of layers. [0519] In an example embodiment of the present disclosure (e.g., referring at least any of FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, FIG.33D, FIG 35, and/or FIG.36), a first wireless device may receive one or more messages comprising one or more open loop power control parameters to be used for determining a transmission power for a sidelink reference signal transmission. The first wireless device may determine, based on the open loop power control parameters, a first transmission power for a transmission of one or more first sidelink reference signals in a slot. The first wireless device may transmit, to a second wireless device and via the slot, the one or more first sidelink reference signals and a sidelink control channel. For example, a first symbol associated with the one or more first sidelink reference signals is multiplied with a first amplitude scaling factor based on the first transmission power. For example, a second symbol associated with the sidelink control channel is multiplied with a second amplitude scaling factor based on the first transmission power. [0520] In an example embodiment of the present disclosure (e.g., referring at least any of FIG.33A, FIG.33B, FIG.33C, FIG.33D, FIG 35, and/or FIG.36), a first wireless device may determining: a first transmission power for a transmission of one or more first sidelink reference signals via a slot; and a second transmission power for a transmission of at least one of a sidelink shared channel or a sidelink control channel via the slot. The first wireless device may transmit, to a second wireless device and using a transmission power among the first transmission power and the second transmission power: the one or more first sidelink reference signals via a first symbol in the slot; and the at least one of a sidelink shared channel or a sidelink control channel via a second symbol in the slot. For example, the transmission power comprises a lower transmission power of the first transmission power and the second transmission power. For example, the transmission power comprises a higher transmission power of the first transmission power and the second transmission power.

Claims

CLAIMS 1. A method comprising: receiving, by a first wireless device and from a base station, one or more messages indicating a sidelink filter configuration; and transmitting, to a second wireless device, at least one sidelink reference signal (RS) using a transmit power based on a pathloss value, wherein the pathloss value is a difference between: - a first value based on a sidelink RS transmit power, per resource element, filtered across sidelink RS transmission occasions using the sidelink filter configuration; and - a reference signal received power value, received from the second wireless device, of one or more sidelink RSs.

2. The method of claim 1, wherein the one or more messages comprises at least one of: a system information block; or a radio resource control message.

3. The method of claim 1, wherein the one or more messages further indicates configuration of the at least one RS.

4. The method of claim 3, wherein the configuration comprises power control parameters of the at least one RS.

5. The method of claim 4, wherein the first transmit power is based on the power control parameters of the at least one RS.

6. The method of claim 1, wherein the transmitting the at least one sidelink RS comprises transmitting, to a second wireless device and via a first slot, a first sidelink transmission comprising the at least one sidelink RS.

7. The method of claim 6, wherein the first sidelink transmission does not comprise a PSSCH.

8. The method of claim 6, wherein the at least one sidelink RS is a standalone sidelink RS.

9. The method of claim 6, wherein the first sidelink transmission further comprises a first physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH) and one or more DM-RSs.

10. The method of claim 9, further comprising determining a transmit power of the PSCCH as the same as the first power.

11. The method of claim 9, wherein the one or more messages comprise a configuration parameter indicating a number of physical resource blocks (PRBs), of the PSCCH.

12. The method of claim 11, wherein the PSCCH starts from the lowest PRB of a subchannel.

13. The method of claim 12, wherein the subchannel is associated with or based on the at least one SL RS.

14. The method of claim 12, wherein one or more subchannels allocated to the at least one SL RS in the first slot comprises the subchannel.

15. The method of claim 1, wherein the one or more messages further indicate configuration of a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS).

16. The method of claim 15, further comprising transmitting, to the second wireless device, one or more configuration parameters of the CSI-RS based on the configuration of the CSI-RS.

17. The method of claim 1, further comprising transmitting, to a second wireless device and via a second, a second sidelink transmission using a second transmit power.

18. The method of claim 17, wherein the second sidelink transmission comprises: a second PSCCH; a PSSCH; the CSI-RS; and one or more second DM-RSs.

19. The method of claim 17, wherein: the second sidelink transmission comprises at least one second sidelink RS; and the at least one second sidelink RS is a non-standalone sidelink RS in response to the second sidelink transmission comprising the PSSCH.

20. The method of claim 17, further comprising determining the second transmit power based on a second pathloss value that is a difference between: a second value based on a PSSCH transmit power, per resource element, filtered across PSSCH transmission occasions using the sidelink filter configuration; and a reference signal received power value, received from the second wireless device, of one or more demodulation reference signals (DM-RSs) associated with PSSCH.

21. The method of claim 20, wherein the configuration comprises power control parameters of PSSCH.

22. The method of claim 21, wherein the second transmit power is further based on the power control parameters of the PSSCH.

23. The method of claim 18, wherein the one or more messages comprise a configuration parameter indicating a number of physical resource blocks (PRBs), of the second PSCCH.

24. The method of claim 23, wherein the PSCCH start from a lowest PRB of the lowest sub-channel of the PSSCH.

25. A wireless device comprising: a receiver, a transmitter, a processing system and a memory, wherein the memory includes instructions adapted to perform the steps of receiving, at the receiver and from a base station, one or more messages indicating a sidelink filter configuration; and transmitting, by the transmitter to a second wireless device, at least one sidelink reference signal (RS) using a transmit power based on a pathloss value, wherein the pathloss value is a difference between: a first value based on a sidelink RS transmit power, per resource element, filtered across sidelink RS transmission occasions using the sidelink filter configuration; and a reference signal received power value, received from the second wireless device, of one or more sidelink RSs.

26. A method comprising: receiving, from the base station, one or more messages indicating a sidelink filter configuration and configuration of at least one sidelink RS; transmitting, to a second wireless device, a first sidelink transmission using a first transmit power, said first sidelink transmission comprising the at least one sidelink RS with no physical sidelink shared channel (PSSCH), wherein the first transmit power is based on a first pathloss value that is a difference between: - a first value based on a sidelink RS transmit power, per resource element, filtered across sidelink RS transmission occasions using the sidelink filter configuration; and - a reference signal received power value, received from the second wireless device, of one or more sidelink RSs; transmitting, to the second wireless device, configuration of a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS); transmitting, to a second wireless device and using a second transmit power, a second sidelink transmission comprising the CSI-RS with PSSCH, wherein the second transmit power is based on a second pathloss value that is a difference between: a second value based on a PSSCH transmit power, per resource element, filtered across PSSCH transmission occasions using the sidelink filter configuration; and a reference signal received power value, received from the second wireless device, of one or more demodulation reference signals (DM-RSs) associated with PSSCH.

27. A method comprising: receiving, from the base station, one or more messages indicating a sidelink filter configuration and configuration of at least one sidelink RS; transmitting, to a second wireless device and via a first slot, a first sidelink transmission using a sidelink RS transmit power, wherein: the first sidelink transmission comprises the at least one sidelink RS and a physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH), and one or more first demodulation reference signals (DM-RSs); and the sidelink RS transmit power is based on a first pathloss value that is a difference between: - a first value based on a sidelink RS transmit power, per resource element, filtered across sidelink RS transmission occasions using the sidelink filter configuration; and - a reference signal received power value, received from the second wireless device, of one or more sidelink RSs; transmitting, to the second wireless device, configuration of a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS); transmitting, to a second wireless device and via a second slot, a second sidelink transmission using a physical sidelink shared channel (PSSCH) transmit power, wherein: the second sidelink transmission comprises a second PSCCH, PSSCH comprising the CSI-RS, and a one or more second DM-RSs; and the PSSCH transmission power is based on a second pathloss value that is a difference between: a second value based on a PSSCH transmit power, per resource element, filtered across PSSCH transmission occasions using the sidelink filter configuration; and a reference signal received power value, received from the second wireless device, of DM-RSs associated with PSSCH.

28. A method comprising: receiving, by a first wireless device and from a base station, one or more messages indicating a sidelink filter configuration; and transmitting, to a second wireless device, at least one sidelink reference signal (RS) using a first transmit power based on a pathloss value, wherein the pathloss value is based on a sidelink RS transmit power, per resource element, filtered across sidelink RS transmission occasions using the sidelink filter configuration.